JP2020108480A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing own balls of a player from extremely decreasing in a high base state.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a start port to be an execution trigger to be a winning lottery and a plurality of general winning ports that are not execution triggers of a winning lottery, is configured to be able to selectively perform shooting to a first flow-down passage and a second flow-down passage of a game area, and enables a game progress to act to be advantageous or disadvantageous to a player by causing a game ball to flow down to either flow-down passage between the first flow-down passage and the second flow-down passage according to a game state. The game machine is configured to cause the game progress to be more advantageous to the player by causing game balls to flow down to the second flow-down passage than to the first flow-down passage while a ball entering state to the start port is in a privilege game state being more advantageous than a normal game state, and is configured so as to make a ball entry rate of second general winning means higher than a ball entry rate of first general winning ports, the plurality of general winning ports including the first general winning ports belonging to the first flow-down passage and second general winning ports belonging to the second flow-down passage.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 2

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

A game machine, for example, a ball game machine, performs an internal lottery for a big hit when the ball enters the starting opening, and also plays a symbol variation display game. As a result of the internal lottery during the symbol variation display game. It is configured to entertain the game by displaying various notice effects reflecting the. In this type of gaming machine, when a big hit is won, it is known that after the big hit game is finished, it shifts to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time saving state or a probability variation state (for example, Patent Document 1 below. ).

JP, 2010-239986, A

When the game is moved to the time saving state or the probability changing state, a so-called "Den Chu support state", in which a game ball easily enters the starting opening, is generated, and a high base state in which the payout rate is higher than the normal state Occurs. However, if the number of balls (such as the game medium owned by the player and the game value equivalent thereto) during the high base state is extremely reduced, the player's willingness to play is diminished and distrust of the game machine is reduced. There is a risk of giving.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a ball (such as a game medium owned by a player or a gaming value equivalent thereto) from being extremely reduced during a high base state.

The above object of the present invention can be achieved by the following means.
(1) Launching means capable of launching a game ball in the game area,
A lottery means for executing a lottery on winning when the starting means detects a game ball,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit, a hit game execution control means for executing and controlling a hit game,
A symbol display means for performing variable display of symbols and displaying a lottery result by the lottery means in a stop display mode of the symbols,
After the hitting game is over, a bonus game state control means capable of controlling to a privilege game state with a ball entry advantageous state in which the entry state to the starting means is more advantageous than the normal game state,
A plurality of general winning means that does not trigger the lottery execution by the lottery means even if a game ball is detected,
When the starting means or the plurality of general winning means detects a game ball, a prize ball payout means for paying out a prize ball, and
Depending on the strength of the game ball that is launched by the launching means, the game area is configured to be able to be divided into a first downflow path and a second downflow path, and the first downflow path and the second downflow path depending on the gaming state. A gaming machine configured such that the progress of the game acts advantageously or unfavorably for the player depending on which of the descending paths the gaming ball is caused to flow down,
During the privilege game state, it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game if the game ball is made to flow down to the second flow-down path rather than the first flow-down path.
The plurality of general winning means include a first general winning means belonging to the first downflow route and a second general winning means belonging to the second downflow route,
The winning rate of the second general winning means is higher than the winning rate of the first general winning means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
(2) Launching means capable of launching a game ball in the game area,
A lottery means for executing a lottery on winning when the starting means detects a game ball,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit, a hit game execution control means for executing and controlling a hit game,
A symbol display means for performing variable display of symbols and displaying a lottery result by the lottery means in a stop display mode of the symbols,
After the hitting game is over, a bonus game state control means capable of controlling to a privilege game state with a ball entry advantageous state in which the entry state to the starting means is more advantageous than the normal game state,
A plurality of general winning means that does not trigger the lottery execution by the lottery means even if a game ball is detected,
When the starting means or the plurality of general winning means detects a game ball, a prize ball payout means for paying out a prize ball, and
Depending on the strength of the game ball that is launched by the launching means, the game area is configured to be able to be divided into a first downflow path and a second downflow path, and the first downflow path and the second downflow path depending on the gaming state. A gaming machine configured such that the progress of the game acts advantageously or unfavorably for the player depending on which of the descending paths the gaming ball is caused to flow down,
During the privilege game state, it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game if the game ball is made to flow down to the second flow-down path rather than the first flow-down path.
The plurality of general winning means include a first general winning means belonging to the first downflow route and a second general winning means belonging to the second downflow route,
The number of the second general winning means is larger than the number of the first general winning means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
(3) launching means capable of launching a game ball in the game area,
A lottery means for executing a lottery on winning when the starting means detects a game ball,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit, a hit game execution control means for executing and controlling a hit game,
A symbol display means for performing variable display of symbols and displaying a lottery result by the lottery means in a stop display mode of the symbols,
After the hitting game is over, a bonus game state control means capable of controlling to a privilege game state with a ball entry advantageous state in which the entry state to the starting means is more advantageous than the normal game state,
A plurality of general winning means that does not trigger the lottery execution by the lottery means even if a game ball is detected,
When the starting means or the plurality of general winning means detects a game ball, a prize ball payout means for paying out a prize ball, and
Depending on the strength of the game ball that is launched by the launching means, the game area is configured to be able to be divided into a first downflow path and a second downflow path, and the first downflow path and the second downflow path depending on the gaming state. A gaming machine configured such that the progress of the game acts advantageously or unfavorably for the player depending on which of the descending paths the gaming ball is caused to flow down,
During the privilege game state, it is configured that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game if the game ball is made to flow down to the second flow-down path rather than the first flow-down path.
The plurality of general winning means includes a first general winning means belonging to the first downflow route and a second general winning means belonging to the second downflow route,
The number of prize balls of the second general prize winning means is larger than the number of prize balls of the first general prize winning means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
(4) The starting means includes
At least a first starting means that does not change the ball entry state of the game ball by the privilege game state control means and a second starting means that changes the ball entry state of the game ball by the privilege game state control means are included.
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
(5) The rate of exit in the normal gaming state is less than 100%,
The winning rate during the privilege game state is configured to be 100% or more,
The gaming machine described in (4) above.
(6) The number of prize balls of the second starting means is smaller than the number of prize balls of the first starting means,
The gaming machine according to (4) or (5), characterized in that.
(7) The number of prize balls of the second starting means is smaller than that of the second general winning means.
The gaming machine according to any one of (4) to (6) above.
(8) The number of prize balls of the second starting means is one, and the number of prize balls of the second general winning means is at least two.
The gaming machine according to (4) or (5), characterized in that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the balls (such as the game medium owned by the player and the game value equivalent thereto) from being extremely reduced during the high base state.

It is a front view showing appearance of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the figure which shows the constitution of the game board and the production button. It is a block diagram which shows a control apparatus. It is a diagram for explaining the hit type and the game state transition. It is an explanatory view with which a screen display of a liquid crystal display device is explained. It is a game flow provided for explanation of game contents (normal, time saving, ST mode). It is a game flow provided for explanation of game contents (precursor, ceiling, heaven mode). It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by the side of main control. It is a flow chart which shows main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 starting opening check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process in FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing ceiling function management processing in FIG. 12. 13 is a flowchart showing a ceiling activation management process in FIG. 12. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition preparation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process front part during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process rear part during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric auditors product management processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot completion process in FIG. It is the flowchart which shows the production control side main processing. It is the flowchart which shows the production control side timer interruption processing. It is a diagram showing a game state transition table selection table for the big hit. It is a figure which shows a game state transition table. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table for ceilings. It is a figure showing a hit variation pattern distribution table (general, omen, ceiling, heaven time saving). It is a figure showing a hit variation pattern distribution table for ST (for ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST end stage). It is a figure which shows a loss variation pattern distribution table (general, omen, ceiling, heaven time saving). It is a figure which shows the ST deviation change pattern distribution table (for ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST last stage). It is a figure which shows the relationship of a game mode classification, an internal game state classification, a fluctuation pattern distribution designation number, and a game state determination number. It is a figure showing an example of production in ST mode concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of production in ST mode which concerns on the 1st modification of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of production in ST mode which concerns on the 2nd modification of the embodiment. It is an explanatory view with which explanation of a pre-reading notice concerning this embodiment is offered. It is explanatory drawing with which the modification of a privilege provision form is demonstrated. It is explanatory drawing with which the modification of a privilege provision form is demonstrated.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiments described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

<1. Outline of configuration: FIG. 1 and FIG. 2>
An outline of the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the outer appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 (hereinafter, abbreviated as “gaming machine 1”) is a game in which a frame-shaped front frame 2 is attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and is attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. The game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a board storage frame (not shown), and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 is made to face the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling game operations are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and if a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated to one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 is set. By operating to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened to the front side.

Below the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 which is pivotally supported by the front frame 2 to be openable and closable by a hinge (not shown) is arranged. An upper tray unit 8 is provided on the front operation panel 7, and an upper tray 9 for storing the discharged game balls is formed on the upper tray unit 8.

Further, in the upper tray unit 8, a ball pull-out button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 below the gaming machine 1, and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the island facility side A ball lending button 11 for requesting the payout of a ball and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable media inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

In the upper tray unit 8, a push button type effect button 13 (first operation means) which also functions as a refreshing button 70 described later, a button 75a indicating an upward direction, a right button 75b, a lower button 75c, and a left button. A cross-shaped direction key 75 (second operation means) which is composed of the button 75d and which can be operated in the vertical and horizontal directions is provided. The effect button 13 or the direction key 75 functions as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation effective reception period (button effective period) in a specific notice effect (for example, so-called “player participation type effect”). If operation input acceptance is enabled during this period and a predetermined operation (for example, one-time press, long press, repeated hits, etc.) is performed during this valid period, a change in production can be brought about before and after the operation. It is like this. In addition, these operation means, the "game setting screen (volume setting, light amount setting, production mode" related to waiting for customers (during "demonstration waiting production" or "customer waiting production (demo screen)" described later) It is also used when the player makes a desired game setting on the "menu screen in which the setting of etc. is possible". The effect button 13 is provided with a built-in lamp (button LED 13b) therein, and the operation acceptance valid period (for example, lighting or blinking in a predetermined color) and the operation are performed depending on the difference in the light emitting mode of the button LED 13b. It is possible to notify that the reception is invalid (for example, the lights are off).

A firing operation handle 15 for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7. The launching device 32 has a launching performance of about 100 shots per minute.

Speakers 46 that produce a sound effect (sound effect) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper portion of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15. Further, a decoration lamp 45 (production LED) that exerts a light production effect by light decoration is provided at an appropriate place of the game machine, for example, in the circumferential direction around the front frame edge of the glass door 6 or inside the center decoration body 48 described later. There are multiple.

(Game board: Figure 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the launched game balls is annularly attached to the game board 3 as a board surface partitioning member, and a substantially circular area surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is provided. The game area 3a and the four corners are non-game areas.

A liquid crystal display device (LCD) 36 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 3a. This liquid crystal display device 36, under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later, in a predetermined display area (design variable display area), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, a left symbol) that are independent of numbers, characters, symbols, etc. , Various designs including a variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of three decorative symbols (a middle symbol and a right symbol (see FIG. 5)) are displayed by images.

Further, in the game area 3a, a center ornament 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long winding manner. The center ornament 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3, and forms a front mounting plate 48a fixed to the game board 3 and the outer periphery of the center ornament 48 to surround the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. The armor frame portion 48b is integrally provided to protect the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and the flow path of the game balls is divided into left and right depending on the launch strength or stroke length of the game balls. It functions as a flow path distributing means that enables the above. In this embodiment, a play area through which the game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball is driven by the launching device 32 to the upper side of the game area 3a. Are distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and flow down either the left-side flow-down path 3b on the left side or the right-side flow-down path 3c on the right side of the center ornament 48.

In addition, the non-gaming area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 has various function display parts, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is used as the upper start opening 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower part. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (first special symbol display device) that are arranged side by side corresponding to the starting opening 35 (for the second special symbol) Second special symbol display device: second special symbol display means) is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a, 38b, the "special symbol variable display game" is performed by the variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of the "special symbol" represented by 7 segments. And in the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device 36, the decorative design by the image is variably displayed in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a, 38b, and various notice effects (effect image) Along with this, the'decorative design variable display game' is executed. The details of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game will be described later.

Further, in the various function display portions, a composite display device (LED display device for reserved composite display) 38c including a 7-segment display device (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The term "composite" refers to the display of the number of operation-reserving balls of the special symbol 1, the display of the number of operation-retaining balls of the special symbol 2, the display of the number of operation-retaining balls of the ordinary symbol, and the variable time reduction function operating (time saving) and This is because it is a hold/time saving/high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as “composite display device”) having five display functions of state notification during high-probability state (high-probability state).

Further, in the various function display portions, a normal symbol display device 39a (ordinary symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged is provided next to the composite display device 38c. In the normal symbol display device 39a according to the present embodiment, the normal symbol variable display game is executed by the variable display operation of the normal symbol represented by the two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, the normal symbol by the LED is alternately turned on and off like a seesaw, and stopped with either side lit, so that the normal symbol variable display game is judged to be right or wrong. There is.

Further, a right-handed display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. This right-handed display device 39b is advantageous in that "right-handed" is advantageous in that the game ball is aimed at so that the game ball passes (flows down) the right-flowing route 3c by a combination of lighting and extinguishing states of the LED. It is notified whether "left-handed" aiming to pass (flow down) the downflow route 3b is advantageous. For example, if the light emitting state of the LED is in a lighted state, it is informed that it is advantageous to hit the right side, and if it is in an unlit state, it is advantageous to hit the left hand.

Further, a round number display device 39c in which two LEDs (round display LEDs) are arranged is provided adjacent to the right-handed display device 39b. The number-of-rounds display device 39c informs the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the big hit by a combination of lighting and extinguishing states of a plurality of LEDs.

Below the center ornament 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting unit) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting unit) The normal variation winning device 41 provided is provided up and down, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper starting opening sensor 34a, lower starting opening sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting passage of a game ball are formed inside each. Has been done.

The upper starting opening 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device) (hereinafter, the first special symbol is "special symbol 1"). It is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as “special figure 1” in some cases), and does not have a'starting opening opening/closing means' for opening or expanding the starting opening. It is configured as a winning device. In the present embodiment, due to the action of the game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), the windmill 44, the center ornament 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the left downward flow path to the upper starting port 34. While the game ball that has flowed down 3b has a configuration that allows easy entry (winning), the game ball that has flowed down the right-flowing route 3c has a configuration that is difficult or impossible to enter.

The ordinary variation winning device 41 is configured as a "winning rate varying type winning device" in which the winning rate of the game ball at the starting opening can be changed by the opening opening/closing means. In the present embodiment, a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 are provided as starting opening opening/closing means, and the movable wing pieces 47 perform an opening/closing operation, so that the lower starting opening 35 is the second special symbol starting opening. Can be opened or expanded.

Further, the lower start opening 35 of the normal variation winning device 41, the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device) (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2"). , Which may be abbreviated as “special figure 2” in some cases), is a winning opening relating to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and the winning area of the lower starting opening 35 depends on the operating state (operating or non-operating) of the movable wing piece 47. The winning state is converted into an open state (easy winning state) and a closed state that makes winning more difficult or impossible than the open state (difficult state of winning). In the present embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, the closed state (state in which winning is impossible) in which the winning in the lower starting opening 35 is impossible is maintained.

Further, on both sides of the normal variation winning device 41, there are four general winning openings on the left side (43a to 43d) and one on the right side (43e), a total of five, and each has a game ball inside. A general winning opening sensor 43h (see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of is formed.

Also, diagonally upper right of the normal variation winning device 41, that is, on the upper side of the intermediate portion of the right downflow path 3c, a normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) formed of a passage gate through which game balls can pass. Has been. This normal symbol starting port 37 is a winning port related to the variable display operation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside it, a normal symbol starting port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball. Are formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol starting port 37 is formed only on the right downflow path 3c side and is not formed on the left downflow path 3b side, but it is not limited to this and may be formed on both downflow paths. ..

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol starting port 37 in the rightward flow route 3c to the normal variation winning device 41, a special variation winning prize configured to be able to open or expand the special winning opening 50 by a collapsible opening door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and inside thereof, a special winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball entered in the special winning opening 50 is formed.

Around the special winning opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms the downstream guide portion of the rightward flow path 3c. There is. When the special winning opening 50 is closed by the opening door 52b (large winning opening closed state), a surface that is continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 is formed to form the downstream guide portion of the right downflow path 3c ( It is designed to form a part of the upper side 55a). Further, in the downstream region of the rightward flow path 3c, in a region above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, to be exact, in the game region above the special winning opening 50, the flow path correcting plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. 51d is provided so as to protrude, and serves to draw the flowing down game ball toward the special winning opening 50.

The process of entering a game ball into the special winning opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the play area between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is projected from the game board 3 and is on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that functions as a guide for the game ball. Come down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correcting plate 51d projecting from the surface of the game board 3, whereby the flowing down direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction of the special winning opening 50 (downward). At this time, if the special winning opening 50 is covered by the open/close type opening door 52b (large winning opening closed state), the game ball rolls over this, and a gauge structure (not shown) is formed. By the (arrangement of game nails), it is guided in the direction of the tulip-type normal variation winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower starting opening 35 is in a winning enable state (starting opening open state), a game ball can be won in the lower starting opening 35, but the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the big winning opening 50 When is open (large prize opening state), the game ball is adapted to be guided into the special winning opening 50. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims the launch position on the side of the special variation winning device 52 (when the player aims at the gaming ball to pass through the rightward flow path 3c), start up. A game ball is hard to be guided or not guided to the mouth 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win the starting openings 34, 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates.

Classifying as to which of the left and right runoff paths the winning means described above belongs to, that is, which of the left downflow path 3b and the right downflow path 3c can be won, the winning means belonging to the left downflow path 3b. Has an upper starting opening 34, a lower starting opening 35, and a left general winning opening 43a to 43d. The winning means belonging to the right downflow route 3c includes an upper starting opening 34, a lower starting opening 35, and a normal symbol starting opening. There are 37, a special winning opening 50, and a general winning opening 43e on the right side. It should be noted that the lower starting port 35 belongs to both the left downflow route 3b and the right downflow route 3c as long as the movable wing piece 47 is open (starting port open state), and winning from any of the left and right downflow routes. It is possible. However, the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 is a rightward downflow because the passage of the game ball (winning) is the operating condition for the normal symbol starting port 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a. It can be said that it belongs only to the route 3c. Further, the big winning opening 50 belongs to only the right downflow route 3c, and only the game balls from the right downflow route 3c can win.

(Structure that is right-handed under certain conditions)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the "right striking" is aimed so that the game ball passes through the rightward flow path 3c, the game ball is easy to win in the normal symbol starting port 37, but the upper starting port A game ball is hard to be guided or not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win the starting openings 34, 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates. However, this movable wing piece 47 operates at an opening/closing pattern that is more advantageous than at least the normal state (normal game state) when a "electrically supported state (electrically supported state)" described later occurs. Therefore, if the gaming ball passes through the left downflow route 3b, instead of "right hitting" aiming at the gaming ball passing through the right downflow route 3c under non-electric support (no electric support). Aiming at "left hitting" is advantageous, while on the other hand, under the electric power support state, "right hitting" is advantageous instead of "left hitting". That is, depending on the state of the game, the progress of the game has an advantage or a disadvantage for the player depending on which of the left downflow path 3b and the right downflow path 3c the downflow path of the game ball is flown. Which of the "strokes" is advantageous for the player (the progress of the game is advantageous for the player) changes depending on the gaming state, and the gaming state is accompanied by a non-electric support state (for example, In the normal state or the latent probability state, "left hitting" is advantageous, and in the gaming state accompanied by the electric support state (for example, a time saving state or a probability changing state), "right hitting" is advantageous.

Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the big winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43 functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a. , A detection switch (winning detection switch) such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43a is a game that has entered the winning means. It functions as a winning detection means for detecting a sphere. Regarding each of the above-mentioned winning means, the number, shape, forming position, etc. can be appropriately changed depending on the playability. In addition, for each winning means, whether the game ball flowing down the left downflow path 3b and/or the right downflow path 3c is difficult to win or not to win, or to be winable is appropriately changed according to the playability. be able to.

When a game ball is won in each prize hole, the number of prize balls per prize ball promised for each prize hole is paid out from the game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 5). For example, the upper starting port 34 is 3, the lower starting port 35 is 1, the normal symbol starting port 37 is 0 (no prize ball)), the big winning port 50 is 15, the general winning port 43a-e is 3 Will be paid out. The game balls that have not won any of the above winning openings are discharged from the game area 3a through the out opening 49. Here, the "winning prize" does not have a structure in which the winning hole takes in the game ball inside or the winning hole takes in the game ball inside, but the winning hole formed of a passage-type gate (for example, a normal symbol starting port 37 ), it means that the game ball passes through the gate, and when the game ball is actually detected by each prize detection switch formed for each prize hole, "win" is given to the prize hole. Is treated as having occurred. The game ball related to this winning is also called a "winning ball".

<Movable body parts>
Further, in the game area 3a, a plurality of movable body accessory objects are arranged at positions that do not obstruct the flow of the game balls. In the present embodiment, the first movable body accessory 80 is disposed on the upper right side in the center ornament 48, and the second movable body accessory 90 is disposed on the lower right side thereof. The first movable body accessory 80 has a timepiece portion 81 including a numeral display portion divided into 12 numeral sectors with numerals from Roman letters “I” to “XII”, and on the timepiece portion 81. And a clock hand 82 composed of a short hand and a long hand that are rotatably formed, and form a “wall clock part” as a whole. In this sense, the first movable body accessory 80 is also referred to as a "clock type accessory". The clock panel 81 has a full-color LED on the back side or inside for each sector division place indicated by the short hand, or the number sector itself is composed of a full-color LED, and each number sector has an independently different color. It is configured to emit light.

In the second movable body accessory 90, a corolla composed of a plurality of petals is arranged around the heart of the flower, and calyx is further arranged around the outer circumference of the flower to make the flower cover into a double shape. The flower-shaped portion 91 (first movable body 91) is attached to the tip of an arm 92 (second movable body 92) capable of swinging, and is configured as a flower-shaped accessory 90 as a whole. In the flower-shaped portion 91, a plurality of petals are rotatable around the flower center. The flower-shaped accessory 90 is normally stationary at an original position (indicated by a solid line in FIG. 2) defined on the edge inside the liquid crystal screen or on the side outside the liquid crystal screen, and when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied, the arm 92 is provided. Tilts to move the flower-shaped portion 91 together with the arm 92 to a position (shown by a broken line in FIG. 2) that covers the liquid crystal screen. Then, when moving to the effect position shown by the broken line in FIG. 2, the flower-shaped portion 91 rotates at the tip of the arm, and the translucent petals and petals can be illuminated beautifully from behind by a lamp or a full-color LED. .. When the flower shaped accessory 90 finishes its operation, it returns from the production position indicated by the broken line to the origin position indicated by the solid line. The flower-shaped portion 91 is capable of performing a plurality of types of operation patterns such as high-speed rotation, low-speed rotation, and reverse rotation as the petal rotation operation. Multiple types of motion patterns are possible, such as a quasi-tilting motion that tilts to a tilting angle, a vibration motion in which an arm rattles, and an inching motion. The above-mentioned clock-shaped accessory 80 (clock hand 82) and flower-shaped accessory 90 (first movable body 91, second movable body 92) are used for notice production depending on the operation mode, and the setting suggestion described later is provided. It is also used when displaying productions.

<2. Controller: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device for controlling game operation control of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

The control device of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter, referred to as "main control unit 20") that generally controls a game operation (a game operation control). And a production control board (production control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as "production control portion 24") that receives the production control command from the main control unit 20 and totally controls the execution control (appearance control) of the production by the production means. Name), a payout control board (payout control means) 29 for controlling the payout of prize balls by the game ball payout device 19, and a power supply (including a backup power supply) necessary for each board of the gaming machine from an external power supply. And a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)). A liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. The power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor having a built-in CPU 201 (main control CPU), and a ROM 202 (main control) that stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program that describes a game operation control procedure. ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and a buffer memory are mounted, and a microcomputer (corresponding to the Z80 system) is configured as a whole.

Although not shown, the main controller 20 gives an interrupt signal to the Z80 system, a CTC that gives a periodic interrupt, a pulse output creating function (bit rate generator) of a constant cycle, and a time measuring function, and an interrupt signal to the CPU. An interrupt controller circuit that performs interrupt enable/disable functions such as timer interrupts, a reset circuit that can detect the power-on/power-off, power failure, etc., and output a system reset signal to reset the CPU, control program Watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors the abnormal operation of the device, running outside the designated area (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is correctly executed within the preset address range, hardware fixed range It also has a counter circuit for generating random numbers (hard random numbers). At least the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 receive a voltage drop signal (power supply abnormality signal) from a power supply board (not shown) to start backup processing before power shutdown, The game operation before power off can be resumed after the power is restored (backup function). In this gaming machine 1, it is possible to hold the contents stored in the RAM for at least several days.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number and a sampling circuit that samples the random number value from the random number generation circuit at a predetermined timing, and works as a 16-bit counter as a whole. The CPU 201 sends an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state to obtain the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (random number size: 65536)). , The random number is used for the big hit lottery. The internal lottery random number is obtained by adding a hard random number value and a soft random number value generated by an appropriate software process in order to prevent a hitting action such as aiming at a hit.

In the main control unit 20, an upper starting opening sensor 34a for detecting a prize for the upper starting opening 34, a lower starting opening sensor 35a for detecting a winning for the lower starting opening 35, and a game ball for a normal symbol starting opening 37. The normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a for detecting the passage of, the big winning opening sensor 52a for detecting the winning of the big winning opening 50, and the general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting the winning of the general winning opening 43 are connected, The main controller 20 can receive detection signals from these. Based on the detection signals from these sensors, the main control unit 20 recognizes which winning opening the game ball has won (ball).

Further, an OUT monitoring switch 49a that detects a game ball (so-called an out ball) discharged from the gaming machine through the outlet 49 and each winning opening is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 outputs the OUT monitoring switch. The detection signal from 49a can be received. The main control unit 20 includes a counting unit that counts the number of out balls based on the detection signal from the OUT monitor switch 49a. The number of out balls depends on whether or not the player continuously shoots the game balls from the launching device 32, whether or not the player wins the starting openings 34 and 35, that is, whether or not the symbol variable display game is executed. No, it will increase. Since the launching performance of the launching device 32 according to the present embodiment is 100 shots per minute, if, for example, “the cumulative number of out balls today is 30000 shots”, the gaming machine 1 has been running for 300 minutes. Operation information (cumulative number of out balls (units)/firing performance (100 shots per minute). Therefore, it can be said that the number of out balls (cumulative number of out balls) is one of the game performance information defined by the specific value. In addition, this out-ball number information is used for calculation of a base value (one of the game record information) described later.

Further, a fraud detection sensor (for example, a vibration sensor, a radio wave sensor, a magnetic sensor: not shown) for detecting fraudulent activity on the gaming machine 1 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 is operated from the fraud detection sensor. It is possible to monitor fraudulent activity on the gaming machine based on the detection signal of.

Further, the main control unit 20 has a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening/closing of the movable blade 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a special winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening/closing of the opening door 52b of the special winning opening 50. Are connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for driving and controlling these.

In addition, the special symbol display device 38a and the special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main controller 20, and the main controller 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the special symbols 1 and 2. There is. Further, the main control unit 20, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected, it is possible to transmit a control signal for display control of the normal symbol.

A composite display device 38c, a right-handed display device 39b, and a round number display device 39c are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 controls the display of various information displayed on them. Control signals can be transmitted.

Further, a frame external terminal board 21 is connected to the main controller 20, and the main controller 20 sends a signal (outer end signal) including predetermined game information via the frame external terminal board 21 to the gaming machine. It is possible to output to outside. The frame external terminal board 21 is configured to be connectable to a so-called "data counter DT" or "hall computer HC" provided outside the gaming machine, and is output from the frame external terminal board 21. The end signal is sent to the "data counter DT" and the "hall computer HC". The main control unit 20, as the outer end signal, for example, winning game start information, winning information to the starting opening (variation start information of special symbols), prize ball number information, various security information (for example, fraud detection information, It is possible to output one or a plurality of outer end signals including RAM clearing, occurrence information such as setting change, etc.). The data counter DT, based on the information included in the outer end signal, specific game information about the gaming machine (for example, the number of big hits, the number of games (number of fluctuations), fluctuation start/stop information of special symbols, winning information, etc.) It is a game information notification device that can be notified, and is usually installed at the top of the game machine. In addition, the hall computer HC monitors and collects game information of the gaming machine based on the outer end signal output from the frame external terminal board 21, and comprehensively manages the operating status of the gaming machine installed in the pachinko hall. It is a management computer dedicated to the game shop that manages it.

Further, the main control unit 20 has a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area (memory in the area) of the RAM 203, and a setting key switch for switching to a setting change allowable state in which a setting value changing operation described later can be performed. 94, a setting change switch 95 for changing the set value in the setting change permissible state, and a setting change completion switch 96 for confirming the set value selected by the setting change switch 95 are connected, and the main control The unit 20 can receive the detection signals from these switches.

In the case of this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 98, the setting change switch 95, and the setting change completion switch 96 are all push-button switches that can be operated by the operator. The setting key switch 94 is a key switch that can be switched between a setting change allowable state (ON) and a setting change prohibition state (OFF) by inserting a setting key and performing ON/OFF operation. Note that these switches 95, 96, 98 are formed in proper places inside the gaming machine from the viewpoint of preventing goto acts (illegitimate acts) such as illegal change operations for setting values, and unless the front frame 2 is opened, the game is played. ON/OFF operation from outside the machine is impossible.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to a setting display device 97 (setting display means) that displays information regarding set values, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of the setting display device 97. .. The setting display unit 97 according to the present embodiment is composed of one 7-segment display unit and is mounted on the main control unit (main control board) 20. The setting indicator 97 is not limited to the main control board 20, but the payout control board 28, the firing control board 29, the relay board (a relay board for relaying the connection between the control board and various display devices, switches, etc.: FIG. It can be provided in an appropriate place inside the game machine, such as a production control unit (production control board (including a liquid crystal control board)) 24 or the like (not shown).

(About setting value)
The main control unit 20 is provided with a "setting change function" capable of changing the expected value (profit) of the profit to be given to the player such as the payout ratio (so-called machine allocation, PAYOUT ratio) in stages. The "set value" is a value indicating this stage. This set value can be confirmed by the setting display device 97, and is appropriately set by the hall clerk based exclusively on the pachinko hall (game shop) sales strategy.

The "set value" defines, for example, a lottery probability (winning probability) of a big hit (a hit type in which a condition device to be described later operates). The higher the set value, the larger the lottery probability (big hit). The winning probability) is set to a high value, which is advantageous for the player. Such a set value can be provided in at least two stages (at least the first set value and the second set value). In the present embodiment, setting values in six stages of settings 1 to 6 are provided. For example, at low probability, setting 1 is 1/240, setting 2 is 1/231, and setting 3 is 1/222. 4 is 1/210, setting 5 is 1/198, setting 6 is 1/189, and so on. That is, the higher the set value, the easier it is to win a big jackpot (the higher the machine cost), which is advantageous for the player. As described above, the “set value” is a value that regulates the events that affect the machine division for each stage, and means the value of the grade related to the easiness of occurrence of a special event such as a big hit. That is, it is possible to configure the jackpot lottery probability at low probability and/or the jackpot lottery probability at low probability to be different according to the set value. When the jackpot lottery probability is in a high probability state (when the special symbol probability changing function described later operates), the probability can be increased to a value not exceeding 10 times. However, the rate of increase may be the same or different for each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the rate of increase is the same for each set value. Speaking of the above example, when the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability is set 1 to 6=1/240 to 1/189 and the increase rate is tripled, the jackpot lottery probability at the high probability is set to 1 to 6. = 1/80 to 1/63.

When a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, the winning probability of one or a plurality of types of jackpots can be changed according to the set value. For example, when there are four types of big hits, big hits 1 to 4, the higher the set value is, the higher the winning probabilities of all the big hits 1 to 4 may be. Only certain jackpots 1 to 3 may be configured to have a higher winning probability (in this case, all jackpots 4 have a common winning probability), or only specific jackpots (eg, jackpot 1 only). ), the winning probability may be increased (in this case, the jackpots 2 to 4 have a common winning probability for all set values). Further, the larger the set value is, the higher the combined winning probability of the big hits 1 to 4 may be. Further, the winning probability of the small hit type that does not trigger the operation of the condition device may be changed according to the set value, as in the case of the big hit described above.

(About setting value change operation)
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, at least the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state, the setting is changed to the permitted state, and when the power is turned on by any other switch operation, It is controlled to the setting change prohibited state. When the setting change switch 95 is turned on in the setting change allowable state, the current display value of the setting display 97 is "1→2→3→4→5→6→1→2→3→...". The display is switched so as to circulate in the range of 1 to 6. When the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on (setting confirmation operation) when the desired setting value is displayed, the current display value is confirmed as the current setting value, and the setting value data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 ( The data is stored in the set value storage area and the predetermined area (memory in the area) of the RAM 203 is cleared. Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change permissible state is ended, and thereafter, the game is started under the decided set value. The main control unit 20 of the present embodiment, based on the operation of a predetermined operation means, a set value selection means for selecting one of the set values from a plurality of types of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player, And a set value setting means for setting the set value selected by the set value selecting means.

In addition, the main control unit 20 can transmit various game processing information such as information about special symbol variable display game and error information to the production control unit 24 by the production control command according to the processing state. .. However, in order to prevent a got action from the outside, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control unit 24 and has a one-way communication configuration in which the signal from the effect control unit 24 cannot be received. Has become.

(About performance indicator 99)
Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to a performance indicator 99 (information display means) for notifying information (hereinafter, referred to as “performance information”) about a game result of a predetermined period (specific game period), and the main control unit is connected. 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for display control of this. The performance indicator 99 of this embodiment is composed of a plurality of 7-segment LEDs. Specifically, four 7-segment LEDs (7-segment indicators 99a to 99d) in which the display unit and the circuit unit are united horizontally are provided. Are mounted on the main control board 20 to form a display device capable of displaying a 4-digit number. Each 7-segment LED has a decimal point DP (dot) below the 7-segment number. The above "performance information" is information that is mainly used by pachinko hall stores and related agencies for confirmation and investigation.For example, abnormal payout performance may occur due to illegal adjustment of game nails or goto actions. It is the information for investigating whether or not the original payout performance of the gaming machine (the payout performance in the design) is legitimately displayed, in other words, "information about the game performance". Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the game progress itself when the player enjoys the game, unlike a notice effect and a setting suggestion effect described later. For this reason, the performance indicator 99 is not installed in a location visible to the player, but is mounted in an easily visible location inside the gaming machine, for example, on the control board or a board case that protects the control board. Further, among the four segments 99a to 99d of the performance indicator 99, at least one segment may also serve as the setting indicator 97.

In the present embodiment, the total number of payouts (the number of payouts at the normal time) in the normal state (the probability that the jackpot lottery probability is low (the normal probability) and the state without electric support described later) and the total number of out balls in the normal state (the normal number) The value obtained by dividing the normal payout quantity by the normal payout quantity and multiplying by 100 (the base payout quantity divided by the normal payout quantity x 100) , Which is adopted as the “performance information”, and is displayed in a predetermined manner by the performance display 99. The base value is displayed on the performance display 99 as a value rounded off to one decimal place. However, instead of simply permanently measuring and displaying the base value (performance information), when the number of out balls being measured reaches a predetermined prescribed number (for example, 60000), the measurement is temporarily terminated. The base value at the end of the measurement is stored in the RAM 203 as history information (the current base value is stored), and measurement of a new base value is started again. Note that, in the case of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned “specified number (60000)” that triggers the measurement end is not the normal number of outs, but the total out that is measured in all game states (including per game). The number of balls (total number of out-of-states) is adopted, and this "total number of out-of-states" is also measured in real time. The processing program concerning the display control and the base value on the performance indicator 99 and the work area thereof are defined in an area (outside area memory) different from the area (inside area memory) that the CPU 201 accesses during normal game progress. ing. Further, the performance information is not limited to the above-mentioned base value in the normal state, and is not particularly limited as long as it is useful game performance information.

Further, a payout control board (payout control section) 29 is connected to the main control section 20, and a payout control board (launch control section) 28 for controlling the launching device 32 and a payout of game balls are connected to the payout control board 29. The game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for performing is connected.

The main role of the payout control board 29 is to receive a payout control command from the main control unit 20, control the prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, and information on the payout operation state to the main control unit 20 ( Status signal) and the like. When it is necessary to pay out the balls, the main control unit 20 can transmit a payout control command (“payout control command” for designating the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29. The payout control board 29 can transmit the status signal to the main control unit 20.

On the payout control board 29, a full detection sensor 60 for detecting the storage state of the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 (whether or not the upper tray 9 is full), the front frame 2 and/or the front operation panel. A door opening sensor 61 (ON when opening/OFF when closing) for detecting the open/closed state of 7 is connected, and the payout control board 29 can receive detection signals from these sensors.

Further, the payout control board 29 is provided in the game ball payout device 19, and is detected from a supply end detection sensor 19a for detecting a supply shortage of the game ball, a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting a game ball (prize ball) to be paid out, and the like. It is possible to receive signals. Further, the payout control board 29 can transmit a control signal for controlling a payout motor 19c of the game ball payout device 19 (a motor that drives a ball payout mechanism section (not shown) for paying out the game balls). ing.

The payout control board 29 indicates, as the above-mentioned state signal, a "ball clogging" indicating a full state based on detection signals from various sensors such as a full detection sensor 60, a door opening sensor 61, a supply end detection sensor 19a, and a ball counting sensor 19b. "Signal", "door open signal" indicating that the front frame 2 and front operation panel 7 are open, "replenishment signal" indicating insufficient supply of game balls, abnormal payout of prize balls (insufficient payout, excessive payout) Various status signals such as a "counting error signal" indicating that the payout operation has been completed and a "payout completion signal" indicating that the payout operation has been completed can be transmitted to the main control unit 20. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether or not the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are in an open state (door opening error), and whether or not the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal ( The prize ball error) and whether the upper tray 9 is full (ball clogging error) are monitored.

Further, a discharge control board (shooting control unit) 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and a discharge control signal (shooting permission signal ES) can be transmitted to the discharge control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls energization to a launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launching device 32 based on the launch control signal to realize a game ball launching operation by operating the launching operation handle 15. .. Further, the strength of launching the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the firing operation handle 15.

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The effect control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor having a CPU 241 (effect control CPU) built therein, and also has a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) storing effect data required for effect control processing and a RAM 243 (functioning as a work area or buffer memory). A control circuit (production control RAM) and a microcomputer with a built-in microcomputer, a sound control unit (sound source LSI), an RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), and a counter circuit (16 bits) for generating hard random numbers in a certain range. Counter, 8-bit counter), an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, a WDT circuit, etc. are provided to control the overall effect operation. The RTC function unit is a clock IC that keeps time, and relates to real-time time information such as the current time (“current time is what hour, minute, and second”) and/or date (month, day, and day). It works as a clock that provides calendar information. Further, like the main control unit 20, it also has a backup function and a soft random number generation means.

The main role of the effect control unit 24 is to receive an effect control command from the main control unit 20, to select and determine an effect based on the effect control command, to control the image display of the liquid crystal display device 36, to control the sound of the speaker 46, and to perform various operations. Emission control of effect LEDs (decorative lamp 45, button LED 13b, and other effect LEDs), operation of various movable body accessories (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90, rotating lamp 62, movable body 73). Control, etc.

The effect control unit 24 also includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit is a VDP that controls overall image output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (effect image data) that the VDP performs image development processing, and a VDP that is developed. VRAM (Video RAM) for temporarily storing the generated image data, a liquid crystal control CPU for outputting control data necessary for VDP to perform display control, a program describing a display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU, and a program therefor. A liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area or a buffer memory are mainly configured.

In addition to the above-mentioned image display effect, the effect control unit 24 includes an optical display including various effect LEDs such as a decorative lamp 45 and button LEDs 13b and 62a in order to bring out a light effect, a sound effect, a movable object effect, or the like. An optical display control unit for the device 45a, a sound control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46, and a movable body role for operating a movable body role object (clock type role object 80, flower pattern part 91, arm 92). A drive controller (motor drive circuit) for the object motors 80c, 91c, and 92c is provided.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to a position detection sensor 82a that monitors the operation of the movable body accessory, and the effect control unit 24, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, the current operation of the movable body accessory. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Further, the effect control unit 24 monitors the operation defect of the movable body accessory based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, and performs a predetermined error notification process if the defect occurs.

In addition, the effect control unit 24 is connected to an effect button switch 13a that detects an operation of the effect button 13 and direction key switches 75a' to 75d' that detect an operation of the direction keys 75 (75a to 75d), and the effect control is performed. The section 24 can receive operation detection signals from the effect buttons 13 and the direction keys 75.

When the production control unit 24 receives the production control command sent from the main control unit 20, based on the information included in the command, the production control unit 24 randomly or uniquely determines from a plurality of types of production patterns prepared in advance. Then, various effect means are controlled at a necessary timing to bring out the desired effect. As a result, display of an effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 (image display effect), reproduction of sound from the speaker 46 (sound effect), and lighting/blinking drive of the decoration lamp 45 and other effect LEDs (light effect) are realized. By expanding various production patterns (variable display operation of decorative designs, notice production, etc.) in time series, a “production scenario” in a broad sense is realized. In addition, during the predetermined operation reception valid period, the effect control unit 24 determines which of the effect buttons 13 and/or the direction keys 75 based on the operation detection signals from the effect button switches 13a and the direction key switches 75a′ to 75d′. It is configured to be able to identify whether such an operation has been performed (for example, pressing, long-pressing, continuous hitting, pressing order of the direction keys 75 in up, down, left, and right directions) (operation identifying means), and depending on the operation mode. It has a structure that can control the appearance.

In addition, the effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte long mode (MODE) and a 1-byte long event (EVENT). To distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit 7 of MODE is set. Bit 7 of ON and EVENT is OFF. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid information, strobe signals are output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, if there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal of is transmitted. Further, event (EVENT) information is set and output after a lapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after a lapse of the predetermined time from the setting. The strobe signal is controlled by the CPU 201 to be in an active state for a predetermined period in which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal, executes the control program for the command reception interrupt process, and the effect control command is acquired in this interrupt process. Has become. Further, unlike the CPU 201, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process (a timer interrupt process that is regularly executed) based on another interrupt when an interrupt occurs based on the input of a strobe signal. Even if there is, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if another interrupt occurs at the same time.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a game operation of the gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Design variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variable display game, decorative symbol variable display game)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the main control unit 20, based on a predetermined starting condition, specifically, that the game ball enters (wins) the upper starting opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35. "Big hit lottery" by random number lottery is carried out. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variably displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variable display game, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, displays the result as a special symbol. The special symbol variable display game is ended by displaying the display on the device.

Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the upper starting opening 34 and the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the lower starting opening 35 are separately and independently performed. Therefore, the big hit lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big hit lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, the first special symbol variable display game is started by variably displaying the special symbol 1 on condition that the game ball has entered the upper starting opening 34, On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on condition that the game ball has entered the lower starting opening 35, the special symbol 2 is variably displayed and the second special symbol variable display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time, if the jackpot lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined "big hit" In the mode, when the big hit lottery result is "small win", in a predetermined "small win" mode, in other cases, in a predetermined "miss" mode, the special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed. The game result (big hit lottery result) is derived from.

In the present specification, for convenience of description, the first special symbol variable display game on the side of the special symbol display device 38a is referred to as "special symbol variable display game 1", and the second on the side of the special symbol display device 38b. The special symbol variable display game may be referred to as "special symbol variable display game 2". In addition, unless otherwise necessary, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (abbreviated as "special symbol" in some cases), and "special symbol variable display game 1" and "special symbol variable display game 1". The special symbol variable display game 2 may be referred to as a "special symbol variable display game" without distinction.

Further, when the above-described special symbol variable display game is started, the decorative symbol variable display game is started by variably displaying the decorative symbol (dramatic game symbol) on the liquid crystal display device 36, and accompanying this. Then various productions are developed. Then, when the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device shows a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variable display game is reflected and displayed by the dramatic decorative symbol variable display game including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variable display game (the result of the big hit lottery) is "big hit", the effect reflecting the result is developed in the decorative symbol variable display game. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a big hit (for example, 7-segment display state of “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left”, “middle” and “right”. In each display area of "", the display pattern in which the decorative pattern reflects "big hit" (hit pattern: For example, in each display area of "left" "middle" "right", three decorative patterns are "7" " 7” and “7” are displayed).

In the case of this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol variable display game ends, and accordingly the decorative symbol variable display game ends, and as a result, the symbol aspect of "big hit" is derived and displayed. After that, the special winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variation winning device 52 operates to open/close the opening door 52b in a predetermined pattern, whereby the special winning opening 50 is opened/closed, and the game is played more than the normal state. A special game state (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player occurs. In this jackpot game, until the opening time of the special winning opening by the opening door 52b elapses a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds), or the number of winning balls to the special winning opening 50 is the maximum winning number ( The prize opening area is opened or expanded until the entrance is opened by one operation of the accessory or the maximum number of prize balls allowed for the expanded prize opening is reached (for example, 10). The "round game" is such that the special winning opening is closed when one of the conditions is satisfied (the condition for closing the round game (the closing condition is established)) is defined by a predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 10 rounds). )Repeated.

When the above big hit game starts, the opening effect is performed using the start interval time (start INT), and when the start INT ends, the round game is repeated multiple times with the predetermined round number (maximum round number) set in advance as the upper limit. Done. When the round game of this time is finished, the next round game is started via a predetermined interval time (INT between rounds). Then, when the maximum number of rounds ends, the ending effect is performed using the end interval time (end INT), and a series of big hit games ends. That is, the big hit game is roughly divided into an opening period (start INT period), a round game period with the maximum number of rounds as an upper limit, and an ending period (end INT period). It should be noted that "round production" appears during a round game, and "inter round INT production" appears between round games (during INT between rounds).

Regarding the information necessary for executing the decorative symbol variable display game, the main control unit 20 firstly, based on the fact that the game ball enters (wins) the upper starting opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35, specifically, , "Big hit", "small hit", or "miss" on the condition that the game ball is detected by the upper starting mouth sensor 34a or the lower starting mouth sensor 35a and the starting condition (starting condition regarding the special symbol) is satisfied. If it is a "big hit", the big hit type is selected, if it is a "small hit", the small hit type is selected, and if it is a "miss", the big hit type is selected. Perform a big hit lottery including'symbol lottery (winning type lottery)' to select a lottery type (If there is one big hit, small hit or lose, you do not need to make a symbol lottery, so skip that lottery Based on the lottery result information, the variation pattern of the special symbol and the special symbol finally stopped and displayed (special stop symbol) are determined. Then, as a production control command for specifying the processing state, a "variation pattern designation command" including at least variation pattern information of special symbols (for example, jackpot lottery result, information regarding variation time of special symbols, etc.), the production control unit 24. Send to the side. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variable display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to make the variations of the production abundant, the "decorative symbol designating command" including the information about the special stop symbol (symbol lottery result information) is also transmitted to the production control unit 24.

In the variation pattern information of the special symbol, in addition to the jackpot lottery result, information that specifies the occurrence (execution) of a specific notice effect (for example, a reach effect type or a pseudo continuous effect (including the pseudo continuous number of times) described later) And can be included. Specifically, the variation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a “hit variation pattern” in the case of a hit and a “lost variation pattern” in the case of a loss according to the result of the big hit lottery, and these variation patterns include, for example, "Reach variation pattern" that specifies execution of reach production (including specification of reach type), "normal variation pattern" that does not specify execution of reach production, and "pseudo-connection" that specifies execution of pseudo continuous production and reach production A plurality of types of variation patterns are included, such as "Yes reach variation pattern" and "Pseudo-relational normal variation pattern" in which execution of pseudo continuous production is specified but execution of reach production is not specified. Further, regarding the reach variation pattern and the pseudo-relational variation pattern, a variation time longer than the variation time of the normal variation pattern is basically set in order to secure the production time of the notice production.

The effect control unit 24, based on the information included in the effect control command (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20, in time series during the decorative symbol variable display game. The effect contents (effect scenario) to be developed in, the decorative design to be finally stopped (decorative stop design), etc. are determined, and according to the time schedule based on the changing pattern of the special design, the notice effect during the decorative pattern changing display game or The appearance control of the variable display effect of the decorative pattern is performed. As a result, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the decorative symbol is variably displayed by the liquid crystal display device 36, during the period of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game. And the period are substantially the same. Further, the effect control unit 24 respectively controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the optical display device 45a, or the sound generation device 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variable display game. As a result, reproduction of an image on the liquid crystal display device 36 (image effect), reproduction of a sound effect (sound effect), and lighting/blinking drive of the effect LED such as the decoration lamp 45 (light effect) are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game have an inseparable relationship, and what reflects the display result of the special symbol variable display game is expressed in the decorative symbol variable display game. The two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In the present specification, the above-mentioned two symbol variable display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variable display games” unless otherwise necessary. Further, the number of executions (the number of games) of the symbol variable display game (particularly, the special symbol variable display game) is changed to "the symbol variable number" or "variation number" or "** rotation (for example, one rotation) for convenience of explanation. 10 rotations, 1000 rotations, etc.)".

(3-1-2. Normal symbol variable display game)
In addition, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 37 (winning), the main controller 20 performs a "assisted winning lottery" by a random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a predetermined variation time, the result is turned on or off of the LED. It is designed to stop and display in combination. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variable display game is "auxiliary hit", the display portion of the normal symbol display device 39a is stopped and displayed in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are lighting state).

When this "auxiliary hit" occurs, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is actuated, whereby the movable wing piece 47 opens in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 opens. Alternatively, the game ball is enlarged and enters a state where the game ball is likely to flow in (starting mouth open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "normal electric open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state occurs. In this normal electric open game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variation winning device 41 is operated (opening operation), and the opening time of the lower starting opening 35 (starting opening open time) is the maximum opening time (for example, 6 seconds at maximum). ) Has elapsed, or until the number of game balls won in the lower start opening 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 at maximum), the winning area is controlled to be opened or expanded, and any one of these conditions is satisfied. When it is full, the opening operation of the movable wing piece 47 is completed and the lower starting port 35 is closed. It should be noted that the lower starting port 35 can be opened one or more times within the maximum opening time.

(3-1-3. Operation holding ball)
In the present embodiment, during the symbol variation display game, during the normal symbol variation display game, during the big hit game, or during the normal electric open game, if a winning occurs in each of the starting ports 34, 35 or the ordinary symbol starting port 37, that is, When there is a detection signal input from the upper starting mouth sensor 34a, the lower starting mouth sensor 35a, or the normal symbol starting mouth sensor 37a, and the corresponding starting condition is satisfied, this is changed as data relating to the starting right of the variable display game, and is changed. Except for the ones related to the display, the maximum number of storages (for example, a maximum of 4) that is a predetermined upper limit value is stored. The on-hold data not provided for this symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the on-hold data is also referred to as "operation holding ball". In order to make the number of the operation-holding balls clear to the player, a dedicated holding indicator (not shown) provided in a proper place of the gaming machine 1 or a holding display provided as an icon image on the screen by the liquid crystal display device 36. Turn on the display.

In the present embodiment, the special symbols 1, the special symbols 2, and the operation-reserving spheres related to the normal symbols are stored in the corresponding storage areas of the RAM 203 up to a maximum of 4, respectively, and are reserved as the number of fluctuations of the special symbols or the normal symbols. In addition, the maximum storage number (maximum storage number) of each operation holding ball number relating to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. Further, all or a part of the maximum reserved memory number of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the game property. In the following, the special symbols 1, the special symbols 2, and the normal design operation reserve balls are also referred to as special figure 1 reserve ball, special figure 2 reserve ball, and universal figure reserve ball.

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned big hit which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) relating to the occurrence of various game states will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a "probability variation function (probability variation function)" in which the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) plays a functional part. There are two types of probability variation function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probability variation function") and probability variation function related to normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol probability variation function").

The special symbol probability changing function is a function that changes the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability, and generates a "high probability state (big hit high probability state)" that is more advantageous than the normal state. .. Under the game state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability changing function is operating, the big hit lottery probability becomes a high probability, so that a big hit is likely to occur. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery probabilities at low probability and at high probability differ depending on the set value (see FIG. 4).

The normal symbol probability changing function changes the probability per lottery per subsidy from a low probability which is a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, from 1/256 to 255/256), which is more advantageous than the normal state. This is a function to generate a "probable change state of auxiliary hit". Under this game state (probability variation state per auxiliary hit) during which this normal symbol probability variation function is operating, the auxiliary hit lottery probability becomes a high probability state, so the auxiliary hit is likely to occur, and the ordinary electric open game frequently occurs. The operating rate improving state in which the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved compared to the normal state.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a “variable time shortening function (time saving function)” in which the main controller 20 plays a functional part thereof. There are two types of time saving functions related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time saving functions") and time saving functions related to ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol time saving functions").

Special symbol time saving function generates "special symbol time saving state" that shortens the average time required for one special symbol variable display game (average time from start of change of special symbol to stop display) It is a function to let. Under the game state in which this special symbol time saving function is operating (special symbol time saving state), the average variation time of the special symbol in one special symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, the average required for reach variation without reach). (The time is shortened from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), and the number of jackpot lots per unit time is improved compared to the normal state, and the lottery number is improved.

Ordinary symbol time saving function generates "ordinary symbol time saving state" that shortens the average time required for one ordinary symbol variable display game (average time from when the regular symbol starts changing until it is stopped) It is a function to let. Under the gaming state in which the normal symbol time saving function is operating (normal symbol time saving state), the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol variable display game is shortened (for example, from 20 seconds to 0.6 seconds). (Shortened), the number of lottery times per auxiliary time per unit time is improved compared to the normal state.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has an "open extension function" in which the main controller 20 plays a functional part. The opening extension function is a function of generating an "open extension state" in which the opening operation period of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 (opening time of the movable wing piece 47) is extended from the normal state. In the open extension state, the opening operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended, for example, from 0.2 seconds to 1.6 seconds, and the number of times of opening and closing thereof is once (open extension function. Is inactive) to twice (when the opening extension function is in operation), so that the operating ratio of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved compared to the normal condition, and the operating ratio is improved. Therefore, when the opening extension function is activated, the winning frequency to the lower starting opening 35 is increased, and as a gaming state, the starting frequency of the special symbol variable display game for deriving the lottery result of the big hit is higher than that of the normal state. As a result, the gaming state is advantageous for the player as compared with the state in which the opening extension function is not activated (non-activated). In this respect, the open extension state is also referred to as the "electricity support state (electricity support state)".

By operating one or more kinds of each of the above functions, it is possible to change the internal gaming state of the gaming machine (internal gaming state). In the following, for convenience of explanation, a special symbol probability variation function, a special symbol time saving function, a normal symbol probability changing function, a normal symbol time saving function, and a game state in which the opening extension function operates are referred to as "probability changing state", and from among these functions The gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function is removed is called "time saving state", at least the special symbol probability variation function operates, and the gaming state in which the opening extension function does not operate (in the present embodiment, the gaming state in which only the special symbol probability variation function operates) ) Is called a “latent probability state”, and a state in which all functions are not operating (non-operating) is called a “normal state”. Therefore, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, when the gaming state is the "time saving state" or the "normal state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes a "low probability state (normal probability)", and the gaming state is In the case of the “latent probability state” or the “probability change state”, the jackpot lottery probability becomes a “high probability state”. Also, during the big hit related to the condition device operation, the big winning opening is opened and closed, but a game occurs, but with respect to each of the above functions, all functions are deactivated, and basically, under the same game state as the above normal state Placed in.

(High base game state)
In the present embodiment, the functions related to the above normal symbols, that is, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the three functions of the opening extension function operate at the same trigger. However, when focusing on the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time saving function and the opening extension function individually, when at least one of these functions operates, the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is improved. Since the winning rate to the lower start opening 35 increases (it becomes easier to win the prize), the gaming state, as the gaming state, is the frequency at which the start condition of the special symbol variable display game for deriving the lottery result for the big hit is met or the payout. The rate (base) is higher than in the normal state and is in the "high base game state (starting entrance ball advantageous state)". The "high base gaming state" here means the gaming state when the function related to the normal symbol (at least one of the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time saving function and the opening extension function) operates, and the special symbol Regarding the function, that is, the gaming state when at least one of the special symbol probability changing function and the special symbol time saving function operates is different.

On the other hand, if you pay attention to the functions related to special symbols (special symbol probability changing function and special symbol time saving function) individually, when the special symbol probability changing function operates, the jackpot lottery probability becomes a "high probability state" higher than the normal state, When the special symbol time saving function operates, it becomes a "special symbol time saving state" in which the digestion time of the special symbol variation display game is shorter than the normal state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the above-mentioned “high base gaming state” in which the starting frequency of the special symbol variable display game is higher than in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the "high base game state", at least the electric Chu support state provided with the extension function is treated as the "high base game state". In this electric choo support state, the operating ratio (opening time and number of times of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning ratio to the lower starting port 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. Since it rises, compared to the case where it is not in the electric power support state (low base game state), the game state is advantageous for the player. Focusing on the presence or absence of this electric Chu support state, if the game state is "normal state" or "latent probability state", there is no "electric Chu support state" (hereinafter referred to as "no electric support state"), When the gaming state is the "time saving state" or the "probability change state", the "electricity chew support state exists" (hereinafter, referred to as "electricity support state" or "electricity support state").

(3-2-1. Internal game state (game state number YJ): FIG. 28)
Regarding the operation status of each of the above-mentioned functions that determine the game state (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function), on the main control unit 20 side, these functions The operation (5AH)/non-operation (00H) is managed by the ON/OFF state of the corresponding flag. The game state focusing on the operating state of each function is also referred to as "internal game state". What kind of internal game state the current internal game state is is managed using an identifier "game state number YJ". For example, if the gaming state number YJ is "00H", specify the "normal state", if "01H", specify the "probable variation state", and if "02H", specify the "time saving state". In the case of "03H", the "latent state" is designated.

(3-2-2. Variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode: FIG. 28)
Here, in the present embodiment, in order to realize various effects related to the above-mentioned internal game state, one internal game state is further classified and managed. Although details will be described later, for example, the normal state includes a plurality of types of normal states such as “general” and “symptom”, and the probable state includes a plurality of types such as “ST early stage”, “ST middle stage”, and “ST end stage”. Includes the probable state of. These are managed as different game states by using the identifier "variable pattern allocation designation number Tcode". The substance of this variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is an identifier (variation pattern selection mode) that is used when selecting a “variation pattern distribution table” (see FIGS. 24 to 27 described later) corresponding to the current game state. Is the data that specifies).

The "variation pattern allocation table" is used when determining a variation pattern of a special symbol relating to the symbol variation display game, and one or a plurality of types of variation patterns (variation pattern of the special symbol) are at least It is determined in association with the current game state (variable pattern allocation designation number Tcode) and the big hit lottery result. For example, when the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is “00H”, the variation pattern distribution table for the general mode is designated, and when it is “01H”, the variation pattern distribution table for the precursor mode is designated. To be done. That is, even if the internal game state is the same "normal state", if the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is "00H", the variation pattern related to the variation pattern distribution table for the general mode is selected, When the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is "01H", the variation pattern related to the variation pattern distribution table for the precursory mode is selected (see S413 in FIG. 12, which will be described later, and FIGS. 24 to 27, etc.). ).

In addition, due to this, a plurality of types of "effect modes" related to the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode are provided, and effects in each effect mode are displayed (executed) on the effect control unit 24 side. You can do it. The details of the effect mode will be described later.

Therefore, the operation status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function) related to determination of jackpot lottery probability and presence or absence of electric support, that is, "internal game When paying attention to "state", even though it is the same "normal state", regarding the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation pattern corresponding to the different variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode "general" or "precursor" can be selected. This is possible, and an effect associated with the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode can be displayed.

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, the types of the "internal game state" include a normal state, a time saving state, and a probability variation state (see the "YJ" column in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the game state related to the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol, in other words, the type of game state related to the "variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode" when focusing on the determination of the effect, rather than the type of internal game state Often included are “general”, “symptom”, “ceiling”, “heaven”, “time saving”, “ST early stage”, “ST middle stage”, and “ST end stage” (see the “Tcode” column in FIG. 28).

In this way, the "internal game state" when paying attention to each function related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support, and the "variation pattern distribution" focusing on the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol (decision of the effect) By managing "designated number Tcode" as different, even if the internal gaming state is the same (for example, normal state), variation pattern corresponding to different variation pattern distribution designated number Tcode (for example, general and aura) You can choose. As a result, even under the same internal gaming state, it is possible to bring about a large change in the digestion time of the symbol variation display game (variation time of the special symbol) and the related production, and under the same internal gaming state. The degree of freedom of production in the production is improved, and a variety of productions can be enriched.

In the present specification, unless otherwise required, at least the game state associated with the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode is referred to as a "game mode" (see the "game mode type" column in FIG. 28). As shown in FIG. 28, this game mode is a game state corresponding to the "variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode and a game state number YJ (internal game state)", in other words, "a game state captured by the entire gaming machine". Can also be treated as For convenience of description, the internal game state and the game mode may be simply referred to as a "game state" without being distinguished from each other. Further, the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number Tcode is referred to as a “fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode)”, and is abbreviated as “Tcode” as appropriate.

<4. About hit>
Next, the “hit” according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hit type, the hit game operation mode, and the transfer destination game state (transfer destination game mode) after the hit game.

(4-1. About hit type)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the winning type of the big hit lottery target, as shown in the figure, there are provided a plurality of types of winning types such as probability variation big hits 1 to 6 and time saving big hits 1 to 2. These hits belong to the "big hit type" which is an operation trigger of the condition device, and are different from hits (small hits) which belong to a so-called "small hit type" which does not act as an operation trigger of the condition device. Here, the "conditional device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for operating the accessory continuously operating device (device for continuously operating the special electric auditors product) for performing a round game, and is specified. A combination of special symbols is displayed, or when the game ball passes through a specific area in the special winning opening (excluding the one that wins the special winning opening while the accessory continuous operation device is operating) .. In addition, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is a condition for causing a state with electric power support (open extension function operation) and probability variation (transition from one internal game state to another internal game state). ..

Therefore, when you win the small hit, the condition device does not work, and the accessory continuous operation device also does not work, so there is no transition of the internal gaming state (the transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small hit winning is not performed. I can't understand). In addition, the hit game by the small hit (small hit game), since the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, a round game like the big hit is not executed, but it looks like, depending on how to determine the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening, It is possible to realize a "pseudo round game" that behaves as if a round game is being executed. The operation mode of the small hit game is basically the same as the big hit game except that the round game is not executed, and after a predetermined start INT has elapsed, an "opening/closing operation game" for opening the special winning opening is executed. When the opening and closing game is completed, a series of small hit games is completed through a predetermined end INT. Just like a big hit, such a small hit is a type of winning that becomes a trigger (execution trigger) of a winning game (special game state) that involves opening and closing the special winning opening. Be different.

Further, when the small hit is won, the internal game state is not changed, but the change pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be changed. If such a transition mode is used, for example, when the gaming state after the small hit game and the gaming state after the other big hit game are moved to the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), the same effect is produced by both. You can stay in the production mode. It is also possible to switch from the first fluctuation pattern selection mode to the second fluctuation pattern selection mode or to re-transfer from the second fluctuation pattern selection mode to the first fluctuation pattern selection mode due to the small hit prize. Is. In the present embodiment, the "small hit" is not provided, but one or more kinds of small hits may be provided for the lottery target on the special figure 1 side and/or the special figure 2 side in consideration of game playability. it can.

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the probability variation big hits 1 to 3 and the time saving big hits 1 to 2 are jackpot lottery objects on the special symbol 1 side, and the probability variation jackpots 4 to 6 are jackpot lottery objects on the special symbol 2 side. Has become. The symbol lottery probability is as shown in the figure.

(4-2. About winning games)
Next, the contents of the hit game by each hit described above will be described.

The notations "5R", "7R", and "10R" in the probability variation big hits 1 to 7 and time saving big hits 1 and 2 in the "hit contents" column of FIG. 4 respectively indicate the maximum number of rounds related to the big hit. Each jackpot of the present embodiment, "maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game, the number of winnings to the big winning opening can be expected to reach the maximum number of winnings (10)" long opening time (For example, 29.8 seconds)” is a big hit. The opening pattern of the special winning opening related to the round game can be set freely. For example, the opening pattern of the special winning opening relating to at least a part of the round game (round game of a specific number of rounds) is set to a “short opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds)” shorter than the long opening time, or Alternatively, it may be set so as to have a further "shortest opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds)". Also, during the maximum opening time, the special winning opening may be kept open, or an opening pattern involving one or more closings (for example, "1.3 seconds open + 0.5 seconds close + 27 seconds open") May be Regarding the profit state (profit degree) during the big hit game, the larger the maximum number of rounds is, the higher it is, and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening is higher in the long opening than in the short opening. In the case of the present embodiment, since the maximum opening time for each big hit is the same, the larger the maximum number of rounds, the higher the profit state during the big hit game.

(4-3. About the destination game state after the winning game: FIG. 4)
Next, a description will be given of the game state (game mode) that is shifted after the above big hit games are finished. In the column of "gaming state/shifting destination gaming state" shown in FIG. 4, the gaming state at the time of winning and the gaming state (shifting destination gaming state) to be shifted after the hitting game are set according to the hit type. The relationship is shown. In the present embodiment, the game state after the big hit game is determined based on at least the big hit type and the internal game state. Specifically, when the big hit is won, the game state after the big hit game is decided based on the game state (internal game state or game mode) at the time of the win and the type of the big hit. (See the game state transition table selection table of FIG. 21 and the game state transition table of FIG. 22 described later). In addition, "game state at the time of winning" in FIG. 4 indicates a game mode (the corresponding internal game state is in parentheses), and "transfer destination game state" is a game mode of the transfer destination (corresponding in parentheses). The internal game state) is shown.

In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, an internal game state to be transferred after the big hit game will be described. Details of the game mode transition mode will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7.

(If you win the 4-3A. Time-saving system jackpot (1-2).
First, a case will be described in which a time saving/hit 1 (5R time saving A) and a time saving/hit winning 2 (5R time saving B) are won. When these time saving big wins 1 and 2 are won, at least the internal game state is shifted to the "time saving state (YJ=02H)" regardless of the game state at the time of the winning. The time saving jackpots 1 and 2 are referred to as "time saving jackpots" because they are jackpots that trigger the transition to the time saving state.

When the above-mentioned "time saving state" is entered, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (number of symbol variations) is continued until the predetermined prescribed number of times is finished, and within the prescribed number of times, a big hit (however, in the internal gaming state When the special symbol variable display game ends without winning the small hit which does not become a transition opportunity), the next game is shifted to the “normal state (YJ=00H)”. In the case of the present embodiment, the count target of the specified number of times is the total number of executions of the special symbol variable display games 1 and 2 (total number of changes of special figure 1 and special figure 2) (count of ST number described later). , As well as counting the number of ceiling games).

When the winning is 1 in the time saving/hits, 100 times (the saving time A) is set as the specified number of times, and when the winning is 2 in the time saving/hits, 50 times (the saving time B) is set. That is, the short-time and big hits 1 and 2 of the present embodiment are limited time-and-short hits that give a finite number of short-time cuts. In addition, you may provide the big hit (infinite short-time short big hit) of continuing the short-time state until the next big hit winning (the number of time-shortening is infinite). In addition, the same number of times and times may be set for the time saving/hits 1 and 2, or only one type of time saving/hits may be used.

(4-3B. If you win the probability variation big hit (probability variation big hit 1-7))
Next, a case where the probability variation big hits 1 to 7 are won will be described.

When any of the probability variation big hits 1 to 7 is won, at least the internal gaming state is shifted to the "probability variation state (YJ=01H)" regardless of the gaming state at the time of the winning. The probability variation big hits 1 to 7 are referred to as "probability variation big hits" in that they are the big hits that trigger the transition to the probability variation state.

In the case of shifting to the “probability change state”, as in the case of shifting to the time saving state described above, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (number of symbol variations) is continued until the predetermined prescribed number of times is finished, When the special symbol variation display game ends without winning the jackpot within the specified number of times, the so-called “number-of-times-cut certainty variation type (ST type (finite certainty variation type)” is that the certainty variation state ends. To be precise, after the jackpot lottery probability has been transferred to a gaming state (probability variation state or latent probability state) involving at least a high probability state, if the above specified number of times is ended without winning the jackpot, the high probability state is ended. Then, the jackpot lottery probability is shifted to a low probability state. The upper limit number of times that this high probability state is continued is referred to as "ST number". Therefore, after the transition to the probability variation state, when the ST number of times ends, the probability variation state ends and the normal state (YJ=00H) is entered (probability variation A described later), and when the ST number of times ends. The case where only the high probability state ends, in detail, "special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability changing function, ordinary symbol time saving function, and opening extension function" only "special symbol probability changing function" ends And a case (probability variation B, probability variation C described later) that is shifted to the “time saving state (YJ=02H)”.

The probability variation state of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of probability variation states (probability variation A, probability variation B, and probability variation C) having different numbers of STs, and the probability variation A, the probability variation B, and the probability variation according to the jackpot type selected. It is designed to be transferred to one of C. Although details will be described later, when focusing on the game mode, the ST100 mode is entered when the probability variation A is entered, the ST75 mode is entered when the probability variation B is entered, and the ST25 mode is entered when the probability variation C is entered. The game mode is adapted to the probability changes A to C (see FIG. 6).

(Probability variation A, Probability variation B, Probability variation C)
The above “probability variation A”, “probability variation B”, and “probability variation C” will be described.

(B) Probability change A (ST100 mode)
Probability variation A is a probability variation state in which the ST number is set to 100 times. In the present embodiment, when the probability variation big 1, probability variation big hit 4 or probability variation big hit 7 is won, the probability variation A is shifted to. In the case of shifting to the probability variation A, the "probability variation state" ends when the ST number of 100 times is completed without winning the jackpot, and the internal game state shifts to the "normal state" from the next game.
(B) Probability change B (ST75 mode)
The probability variation B is a probability variation state in which the number of STs is set to 75 (the number of STs of the probability variation B<the number of STs of the probability variation A). In this embodiment, when the probability variation big hit 2 or the probability variation big hit 5 is won, the probability variation B is shifted to. In the case of shifting to the probability variation B, the "probability variation state" ends when the ST number of 75 times is completed without winning the jackpot, and the next game is shifted to the "time reduction state" of 25 time reduction times. Specifically, after shifting to the probability variation state after the big hit game, when a predetermined number of STs are finished, only the high probability state is terminated (the special symbol probability variation function is OFF), and the game state is set to “low probability state + electric The state is changed to the “supported state”, that is, the “time saving state” (here, the probability variation B=“75 ST times+25 time saving times”). Then, when 25 times are saved without winning the jackpot, the "hour saving state" ends, and the next game shifts to the "normal state". Therefore, the electric support itself is provided with 100 times as in the above-mentioned probability variation A, but the probability variation B is that the probability variation A is shifted to the time saving state after a predetermined ST number of times. Is very different from.
(C) Probability variation C (ST25 mode)
The probability variation C is a probability variation state in which the number of STs is set to 25 (the number of STs of the probability variation C<the number of STs of the probability variation B). In the present embodiment, when the probability variation big hit 3 or the probability variation big hit 6 is won, the probability variation C is transferred. In the case of shifting to the probability variation C, the "probability variation state" ends when the number of STs reaches 25 without winning the jackpot, and the next game shifts to the "time reduction state" of 75 reductions in the working hour (here, Probability change C=“ST number of times 25+time reduction number of times 75”). When the time saving number of 75 times ends without winning the jackpot, the "time saving state" ends, and the next game shifts to the "normal state". Like the probabilistic variations A and B, the probable variation C is given 100 times of electrical support.

It should be noted that the probability variation big hits 2, 3, 5, and 6 are “pure probability variation jackpots (probability variation probability short-time jackpots)” in that “probability variation state of a predetermined number of STs + time reduction state of a predetermined number of shortening times” is given. However, in the present specification, it is treated as belonging to the “probability variation jackpot” in that it first shifts to the probability variation state. Therefore, to be precise, there are "probability variation big hit" that does not give a time-shortening state and "probability variation time-short big hit" that gives a time-shortening state.

The probability variation A, the probability variation B, and the probability variation C have the same number of times of power support (the number of times in the state with power support) (100 times), but at least one of the probability variation A, the probability variation B, and the probability variation C is different. It may be the number of electric support. For example, the probability variation A is 200 power transmissions, the probability variation B is power support 150 times, the probability variation C is 100 power support, the probability variation A is 200 power support, the probability variation B is power support 150 times, the probability variation C is power support 150 times. Can be times. Further, the probability variation B and the probability variation C have been described as transitioning from the probability variation state to the time saving state, but the probability variation state may not be transitioned to the time saving state, that is, the probability variation state with a predetermined number of STs. In other words, the probability variation big hits 2, 3, 5, and 6 may be defined as the “probability variation big hit”, which is the same as the probability variation big hits 1 and 7, instead of the “probability variation short-time big hit”. Further, at least a part of the probability variation big hits of the present embodiment may be a latent probability big hit (latent probability state transition trigger big hit). For example, the probability variation big hits 1 to 3 on the special map 1 side can be set as latent probability big hits.

<5. About production ＞
(5-1. Performance mode)
Next, the effect mode (effect state) will be described. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes related to the game state (internal game state and/or variation pattern selection mode), and these effect modes relate to the current game state. The production can be revealed. Each effect mode is basically configured to be controllable between the effect modes in accordance with the transition (update) of the game state. For example, the "normal effect mode" related to the "normal state", the time saving state There are multiple types of production modes according to each game state, such as "time-saving production mode" related to "," probability variation production mode (ST production mode) related to probability variation state, "time-saving production mode" related to time-saving state, etc. Has been. In addition, in each effect mode, a background display (background effect) as a background of the variable display screen of the decorative pattern or a background effect is provided so that the player can understand what kind of game state the player stays in under the effect mode. The BGM is controlled to be switched to the background display related to the gaming state. The details of each effect mode will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 to 7.

The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a function unit (effect state transfer control means) that controls the transfer between the plurality of types of effect modes. The production control unit 24, among the production control commands sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), is a production control command including information about the game state, specifically, the current game state is specified, and the game state is specified. The production mode is configured to be manageable based on the information included in the specific production control command that specifies that the transition is made. As a result, the effect control unit 24 manages the effect mode in a manner that maintains consistency with the game state on the main controller 20 side, and controls the transition from one effect mode to another effect mode according to the processing state. To do. The above-described specific effect control commands include, for example, a variation pattern designation command, a game state designation command, and a specific command (big hit start command or big hit end command) transmitted during a hit.

(5-2. Notice production)
Next, the notice production will be described. The production control unit 24, based on at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command (in the present embodiment, information included in the variation pattern designation command and/or the decorative pattern designation command), various types of jackpot lottery results. "Preliminary performance" is configured to be controllable to appear (preliminary performance appearance control means). The main role of the notice production suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not the winning type has been won (known "expected degree of winning") (preliminary notice), or the expectation of occurrence of a particular notice production (specific expectation of occurrence) Is suggested. Most of the notice production works as a "creation production" to encourage the player's expectation of winning. Typical notice productions include "reach production", "pseudo-relational production", "player participation type production", "prefetch notice", and so on. There are various notice effects (so-called step-up effects, cut-in effects, etc.) that occur redundantly or independently.

(5-2-1. Reach production)
The “reach effect” means an effect mode involving a reach state (so-called “temple state”), and specifically, an effect mode in which a game result can be derived and displayed via the reach state. There are some reach effects in which when a specific reach effect appears, the expectation of winning is relatively higher than when a normal reach effect (N reach (normal reach) appears. It is called “SP reach.” SP reach has a relatively longer production time (variation time) than N reach in order to fuel the player's expectation of winning, and normally via N reach. The N reach and the SP reach include a plurality of types of reach associated with the expected winning degree.

In most cases where the game result is a win, a winning symbol (for example, a symbol matching symbol) is derived and displayed via this reach effect. In other words, some kind of reach effect may appear in the process of deriving and displaying the winning symbol. Therefore, the presence or absence of the reach effect is a clue for the player to know the winning possibility. Therefore, a plurality of types of "preliminary productions" are provided as production modes that give advance notice (indication) of the possibility of the reach production, in other words, production modes that can more clearly announce the expectation of winning. Although this "preliminary notice effect" plays a role as a stirrup effect for notifying the expected winning degree, there is a possibility that a specific effect (for example, reach effect or pseudo-relation) may occur, or It also plays a role of definitely reporting the occurrence. Therefore, for example, in a reach production scenario, a certain notice production may occur before the reach production occurs to give a notice of the possibility of the reach production and the expected winning degree. In other words, the expectation of winning is further clarified and the player's expectation of winning can be fueled more than when the reach effect is generated alone, with other notice effects. In addition, the notice production may occur in combination (simultaneously or redundantly) with one or more types of expected notice productions in association with the jackpot lottery result. , A clearer expectation of winning is shown. For example, if a high-anticipation notice production with a high winning expectation is combined even if it is a low-anticipation notice production with a low expectation of winning, if the expectation of winning is further increased, and if multiple high-anticipation notice productions are combined. , The expectation of winning is dramatically increased.

(5-2-2. Pseudo rendition (pseudo rendition))
The "pseudo-run" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a pseudo continuous change display state (so-called "pseudo change") of decorative patterns. This "pseudo-variation" is a display operation such that a part or all of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol variable display game, and the decorative symbol is re-variably displayed from the temporarily stopped state. It refers to a variable display mode that is repeated once or a plurality of times. This point is different from the "prefetching notice effect" described later that can be executed over a plurality of symbol variable display games. Basically, the occurrence rate of “pseudo-run” is determined so that the expectation of winning increases as the number of pseudo-variations increases. For example, when the number of pseudo-variations is once, the probability of occurrence of a notice effect (for example, SP reach) having a higher expectation of winning is higher. Therefore, in the case of the production scenario including the reach production, the "pseudo-relation" is mainly generated in the stage before the reach state is formed (the stage before the reach production), and after the pseudo variation is performed once or a plurality of times. The reach effect that is the main variation is executed, and the final game result is derived and displayed. In this specification, when it is called pseudo N, it means the number of times that the pseudo fluctuation M times and the main fluctuation are combined. For example, the notation “pseudo 2” means “one pseudo variation+main variation”, and the description “pseudo 3” means “twice pseudo variation+main variation”.

(5-2-3. Player participation type production)
The “player participation type effect” is an effect mode that belongs to so-called “button notice effect”, and is a predetermined operation (for example, pressing once, long-pressing) with respect to the operation means (effect button 13 and/or direction key 75). This is a notice production mode in which the content of the production can change based on the content of the operation when the button is pressed or repeatedly hit. In the player participation type production, during a predetermined button effective period, an "operation instruction production" for instructing a predetermined operation to the operating means appears, and the player operates the operating means during the button effective period. When operated, the currently displayed effect changes to another effect (operation-time effect) based on the operation content, and the expected winning rate, winning, or setting suggestion information is set according to the effect mode (effect content) before and after the operation. It is possible to inform such as. The effect control unit 24 sets a function effective period (button effective period) in which the operation of the operation means is effective, based on a predetermined setting condition (for example, a predetermined timing during the player participation type effect). Effective period setting means), pre-operation effect control means capable of controlling the appearance of a predetermined pre-operation effect during the button effective period, and a predetermined operation effect based on the operation of the effect button during the operation effective period. And an operation time effect control means capable of performing execution control.

(5-2-5. Look-ahead notice production)
"Pre-reading notice production" (hereinafter abbreviated as "pre-reading notice") is an operation-holding ball (undigested operation-holding ball) that is not yet used for execution of the symbol variation display game (variation display operation of special symbols) , Mainly, by using the hold display mode (holding change type prefetching notice) and the effect during the symbol variation display game that is executed first in time series (symbol changing type prefetching notice) This is an effect mode in which the degree of expectation can be notified in advance.

The outline of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment including the prefetching notice will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to the present embodiment.

In a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (below the display area of the decorative pattern in the figure), a reserved display area 76 for displaying the number of special figure 1 operation reserved balls and the number of special figure 2 operation reserved balls are displayed. A hold display area 77 for displaying is provided, and whether or not there is an operation holding ball is indicated by a lighting state (with an operation holding ball: “○ (white circle) in the figure”) or an off state (without an operation holding ball: Information about the current number of operation-reserving balls is notified by a broken line circle).

The display regarding the presence/absence of this operation-holding ball (hereinafter, referred to as “holding display”) is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (prize order), and the leftmost operation-holding ball in each hold display area 76, 77 is It is displayed as the operation hold ball that occurred first (that is, the oldest) on the time axis among all the operation hold balls in the hold display. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the hold display portions a1 to d1 (contains a hold icon (icon image) provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 by the same number (4) as the maximum hold storage number (4). Special symbols 1 side), a2-d2 (corresponding to special symbols 2 side) are provided. Further, on the left side of the hold display areas 76 and 77, a changing display area 78 for showing the operation hold balls actually used in the special symbol change display game is provided. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured such that an image in which the icon of the game in-hold K currently used for the game appears on the icon of the seat J is displayed. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the icon (icon image) of the oldest hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the game running hold K. As an icon, the icon moves to the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and the state is maintained for a predetermined display time. In addition, depending on the game state (game mode or internal game state), for example, during the first game state (during normal mode (normal state)), the display area of the hold display area 76 is emphasized more than the hold display area 77. Display (display preferentially, display large, etc.), or conversely, during the second game state (for example, the time saving mode (time saving state) or ST mode (probability change state) described later), the reserved display area The display area 77 can be displayed more emphasized than the hold display area 76. Further, both the hold display areas 76 and 77 can be displayed during the first game state, and the hold display area 77 can be preferentially displayed during the second game state.

When the operation-holding ball occurs, the pre-reading determination information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of operation-holding balls at the time of the pre-reading determination (the number of existing operation-holding balls including the operation-holding ball that occurred this time) are generated as production control commands. An identifiable “hold addition command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see step S323 in FIG. 11 described later). The pre-reading determination information is, specifically, in the main control unit 20, a big hit lottery result (a big hit lottery result at the time of start of change) or a start of change, which is executed when the operation-holding ball is used in the symbol change display game. It refers to the game information obtained when the time variation pattern and the like are determined in advance. Therefore, this pre-reading determination information includes at least pre-reading determination result (pre-reading winning result) information of the winning lottery result at the start of fluctuation, and other, pre-reading determination result (pre-reading symbol result) information of the pattern lottery result and fluctuation. Pre-reading determination result (pre-reading variation pattern) information regarding the variation pattern at the start can be included. What kind of information including the pending addition command to be sent to the effect control unit 24 can be appropriately determined according to what the notice content to be notified is to be. For example, the "look-ahead variation pattern" obtained by the look-ahead determination when the operation-holding sphere occurs does not necessarily have to be the "variation pattern at the start of variation" itself obtained when the operation-holding sphere is subjected to the variation display operation. .. For example, in the case of a variation pattern in which "N reach 1" is designated at the start of variation, the content designated by the look-ahead variation pattern is not the type of reach "N reach 1" itself, but the skeleton of "N reach 1". Species (N reach 1 or N reach 2)” may be designated.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command, based on the readahead determination information included in this command, as a part of the display control process related to the above hold display, the effect control process relating to the “readahead notice” is performed. Specifically, based on the information included in the hold addition command, a pre-reading notice lottery is performed in which the possibility of executing the pre-reading notice is drawn, and when this is won, a production scenario of the pre-reading notice is determined. Then, according to the scenario, a pre-reading notice corresponding to the expected degree of winning is displayed. The winning probability of the pre-reading notice lottery is higher in the case of “big hit” than in the case of “miss” and in the case of the reach type having a relatively high expectation of winning. Therefore, the expected degree of winning is indicated by whether or not a pre-reading notice is generated.

In this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice lottery is won, the hold icons of the hold display parts a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 (for example, the icon shown in Note 3 of FIG. 29 described later, the alien icon shown in FIG. 32, etc. ), the hold icon that is the subject of the pre-reading notice is, for example, from white of the normal hold display (normal hold display mode) to special hold colors and colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow of the notice display. A pre-reading notice of the "holding change system" (hereinafter referred to as "holding change notice") that changes to the hold display (special hold display mode) marked with is given. FIG. 5 shows an example in which the operation holding balls of the hatched holding display portion b1 are changed to the special holding display. Here, the blue, green, red, and iridescent display of the hold icon means that there is a high expectation of winning in this color order, and in particular, the iridescent hold icon display is the jackpot confirmation (winning) display. It is a premium hold icon (preliminary reservation notice). Therefore, this hold display section functions as a hold display means for displaying the number of operation hold. However, in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect, the holding display mode of the corresponding one of the holding display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined pre-reading notice display mode (special holding display mode). However, this serves as a means for generating a prefetching notice effect. If a pre-reading notice occurs, if a high-anticipation notice with a relatively high expectation of winning (such as a high number of simulated runs or SP reach) occurs during the pattern variation display game for the operation-holding ball, the pre-reading notice will occur. Combined with the content of the notice production, the expectation of winning the prize will be further enhanced.

The existing operation-holding balls are sequentially digested when the symbol variable display game is executed. At this time, in order to express that one operation-holding ball has been exhausted, the display position of the hold display section corresponding to the existing operation-holding ball is moved up (sequentially shifted to the left), and the display number is reduced. Although control (shift display) is performed, the special hold display described above is continuously displayed while changing the display position of the hold display during this period. In addition, the special hold display is not limited to the case where the winning is presented as an opportunity, but it is the normal hold display at the time of winning, but at a predetermined timing such as shift display, the normal hold display is changed to the special hold display, It is possible to change to a special hold display having a higher expectation of winning than the current special hold display (for example, change from blue to a hold color of yellow or more). In addition, when the game execution hold K is placed on the seat J, basically, the same display mode as the hold display modes in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and in the present symbol variable display game. A look-ahead notice (special hold display) for the operation holding balls can be notified to the player even during the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the pre-reading notice different from the above-mentioned pending change notice, the above-mentioned "symbol changing medium pre-reading notice (hereinafter, referred to as "changing pre-reading notice") can be displayed. This change-ahead read-ahead notice can be executed one or more times in the symbol change display game, and is, for example, a read-ahead notice that can be executed one-shot or continuously. In the changing prefetching notice, when the game ball wins the starting opening and the starting condition is satisfied, the right to execute the symbol variation display game related to the satisfaction of the starting condition is temporarily stored and stored, and the changing prefetching notice execution lottery (In this embodiment, a lottery independent of the execution lottery of the notice of pending change) is performed. When executing the pre-reading notice during change (when winning the lottery), if there are multiple existing operation pending balls (reserved memory) at that time, the variable display of all or part of the reserved memories The higher the expectation of winning is as the game is executed (the symbol variable display game relating to the operation-holding balls that is the target of the current lottery may be excluded) and the pre-reading notice is continuously executed. For example, in the case of the fourth operation-holding ball that is the target of the lottery this time, the first to third operation-holding balls stored earlier in time series are displayed in the pattern variation display game. When provided, a dedicated effect is displayed by using one or a plurality of effect means during the symbol variable display game. In this case, the expectation of winning is highest when the variable prefetching notice is continuously executed (three consecutive executions) for the first to third operation holding balls. The effect means and the effect contents used for the changing prefetching notice can be appropriately determined. For example, if it is an image display, a combination of a background display and a decorative pattern may be used, or a dedicated sound effect, light effect, or movable object effect may be combined with this image display. In addition, the execution lottery for advance notice of pending change and the execution lottery for advance notice of change in advance are independent lottery. Therefore, there may be a case where a notice of pending change and/or a notice of prefetch during change occur.

Further, in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal screen shown in FIG. 5, as a display area for sub-effects (sub-effects) different from the main effects such as decorative designs and notice effects, the operation-holding balls of special figures 1 and 2, There is provided a sub-display area 79 capable of displaying the number of universal figure operation reserve balls, information regarding the variable display operation of special figures 1 and 2, and information regarding the variable display operation of the universal figure. The information in the sub display area 79 continues to be displayed even when the display of the decorative pattern is hidden during the notice effect. Therefore, whether or not the symbol variable display game is currently in progress can be identified by the information in the sub display area 79.

(4-2-6. Setting suggestion production)
In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to present a production mode (setting suggestion production) that suggests the information regarding the “setting value”. For example, the following setting suggestion effects (a) to (shi) are provided.
(A) "Low setting suggestion production" that suggests a low setting range (settings 1-3, 1-2, 2-3, etc.).
(H) "High setting suggestion production" that suggests a high setting range (settings 4 to 6, 4 to 5, 5 to 6, etc.).
(G) “Even setting suggestion” that suggests even settings (settings 2, 4, and 6).
(Y) "Odd setting suggestion" that suggests odd settings (settings 1, 3, 5).
(B) "Specific setting confirmation effect" for definitely informing a specific setting value (any one of the settings 1 to 6). For example, a "setting N confirmation effect" that definitely notifies "setting N". However, it is not preferable to indiscriminately notify the internal set value. The reason is that, such as setting 1 and setting 2 settling, which definitely suggests the low setting region, will reduce the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is preferable to definitely notify any of the settings 4 to 6 of the high setting region. In particular, if a specific setting confirmation effect in which a high setting such as setting 5 confirmation or setting 6 confirmation is established appears, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the game.
(D) "Specific setting negative effect" that definitely informs that it is not a specific setting value (any of the settings 1 to 6).
(4) "Specific range suggestion production" that suggests the setting value of the specific range. For example, setting 3 to 5 (α≦setting value≦β) is suggested, setting 4 or more (α≦setting value) is suggested, and plural specific values of “settings 1, 3, 5, 6” are suggested. .. In addition, by changing the appearance rate according to the set value, it is likely that a certain set value is high/low, for example, it is difficult to get out in setting 1, slightly out in setting 4, and easy to come out in setting 6. It is possible to

Such a setting suggestion effect can be displayed at a predetermined timing in the symbol variable display game, for example, in combination with the notice effect or alone. For example, an item or character corresponding to the set value may appear. Further, by setting the appearance rate of a specific notice effect according to the set value, the notice effect itself can be made to function as a "setting suggestion effect". For example, by changing the appearance rate of a specific SP reach, a specific pseudo-repetition number, a specific player participation type effect, a specific look-ahead notice, etc. according to a set value, the notice effect itself is used as a setting suggestion effect. By making it function, it is possible to give the player a guess element of the set value. For example, if SP reach C is likely to appear at the time of losing, a high setting richness is set. If loss is high, pseudo continuous 4 times variation (pseudo variation 3 times + main variation) is likely to appear, high setting richness, specific button operation effect. If appears, it is “setting 6 confirmation suggestion” or the like. In addition, the setting suggestion effect is not limited to during the symbol variation display game, and is also displayed in a big hit game, a "demo start waiting effect", a "waiting customer effect (demo screen)", etc., which will be described later, waiting for the game to start. It is possible. Further, the appearance rate (execution probability) of the setting suggestion effect can be appropriately determined according to the set value. For example, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect may be set to be lower as the setting value is relatively lower.

<6. Direction>
Various effects in the gaming machine 1 are revealed by the effecting means arranged in the gaming machine. Such a rendering means may be a stimulus transmitting means capable of exerting a rendering effect by appealing to human perception such as sight, hearing, and tactile sense, and a light generating means (light rendering means) such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device. ), a sound generating device (sound effect means) such as a speaker 46, an effect display device (display means) such as a liquid crystal display device 36, a pressurizing device for transmitting a contact pressure to the operator's body, and a vibrating device for vibrating the player. Typical examples thereof include a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to the player's body (for example, the firing operation handle 15 shakes), or a movable body accessory that exerts a visual effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a display device that visually appeals similarly to the image display device (image display means), but differs from the image display device in that it also includes a device that does not depend on an image (for example, a 7-segment display device). When referred to as an image display device, it mainly refers to a type in which an effect (image display effect) is displayed by displaying an image, and a device such as a 7-segment display device that displays an effect other than an image is one of the concept of the effect display device. Included in.

<7. Transition mode of game mode: FIG. 6, FIG. 7>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, the contents of the “game mode” related to the variation pattern selection mode and the transition control between the game modes (between the game states) will be described. 6 and 7 are game flows showing an outline of the game mode and the effect mode related to the game mode.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, a plurality of types of game modes such as general, aura, ceiling, heaven, ST (ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST late stage) are provided, and these game modes are provided. The progress of the game is controlled under the mode.

(7-1A. "Regular mode")
The normal mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the normal state, and this normal mode is an initial stage that is started when RAM clearing (for example, RAM clearing operation or setting change) is executed. Is in the game mode.

The normal mode includes a "general mode" in which the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "00H" and a "prediction mode" in which the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "01H". The "general mode" is a gaming mode in which the player can stay for the longest while the game is in progress. Will be done.

(7-1A-1. Production in general mode)
During the general mode, the mode is shifted to the "general effect mode" which produces effects related to the general mode. The general effect mode according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of general effect modes. For example, the player operates the operation means (the effect button 13 or the direction key 75) while waiting for a customer, so It is possible to switch to the general production mode. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in the block frame of the normal mode in FIG. 6, "normal mode (normal A effect mode)", "simple mode (normal B effect mode)", "premium mode (normal B effect mode)" It is possible to select any of the three types of effect modes (player selectable effect mode). However, it should not be confused that these effect modes are effect modes under the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode=00H), and the player can freely switch the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) itself. Does not mean. Therefore, depending on the difference between normal, simple, and premium modes, the appearances that appear may differ, but since the variation pattern (variation pattern distribution table) of the special symbol that is internally selected does not change, the symbol variation display game Time (variation time of special symbols) itself does not change.

The "normal mode" is a default production mode, and the "simple mode" is a production mode in which the probability of appearance of a particular notice production is low or does not appear at all (appearance rate 0%) compared to the normal mode. Yes (specific notice production appearance rate change mode).
In the “simple mode”, for example, (a) the appearance rate at the time of losing a specific high-anticipation notice with a relatively high expectation of winning (for example, expectation of winning of 30% or more in the normal mode) is higher than that in the normal mode. It has a low probability, and when the particular high-anticipation notice appears, the expectation of winning is significantly increased, and the excitement degree when the high-anticipation notice appears is increased. (B) The probability of occurrence of a specific low-anticipation notice with a relatively low winning expectation (for example, a production with a winning expectation of less than 30% in the normal mode, a pre-reading notice) has a lower probability of occurrence (0% than in the normal mode). Is included, and there is little excessive agitation effect (effect at the time of losing), and a simple effect is suitable for a player who likes it. Also, (c) the appearance rate of the player participation type production has a lower probability (including 0%) than the normal mode, and the appearance rate of the production accompanied by the production button operation has a low probability. Suitable for people.
In "premium mode", the probability of occurrence of winning system effects (effects with a large jackpot winning prize (for example, a winning expectation of 90% or more) or jackpot winning confirmation effects) is higher than in the normal mode and the simple mode. The appearance rate of a plurality of specific low-anticipation notices has a low probability (including 0%). Therefore, the production mode is suitable for a player who wants to enjoy the appearance of a premium production that can give an advance notice.
It should be noted that the appearance rates of the setting suggestion effects may be the same or different in the normal, simple, and premium effect modes.

Further, in each of the normal, simple, and premium effect modes, it is possible to identify which mode is being performed, so that a unique effect corresponding to each effect mode appears. Specifically, an image display effect (for example, a background image (background display), a character that appears in the notice effect, or a decorative pattern), a sound effect (for example, BGM, a sound effect), and a light effect (for example, a specific image). At least one effect of (light emitting mode of the effect LED) changes corresponding to each effect mode. As a result, it is possible to identify which of the normal/simple/premium effect modes is in effect. In the present embodiment, in the general mode, a background image of the sun shining is used as a base, and in the “normal mode”, a background image reminiscent of the season “spring” (for example, a background image including a cherry tree), “ A background image that reminds you of the season "summer" in "Simple mode" (for example, a background image that includes the sea and sandy beach), and a background image that reminds you of the season "autumn" in "Premium mode" (for example, a background that includes autumnal mountains and trees. Image), etc., and the background display (background effect) is controlled to be switched at least according to each effect mode. In addition, under other game modes, at least two effect modes of normal, simple and premium modes can be configured to be switchable. In this case as well, as described above, it is possible to have a configuration in which it is possible to visually identify which mode is being used.

(7-1B. Regarding precursor mode)
In addition, the above-mentioned “symptom mode” is a game mode in which a “ceiling (hamari relief function)” described later is approached, and, for example, a “sign effect” for notifying that the ceiling is approaching is executed. It is provided as a game mode for. The omen mode is shifted to when a predetermined number of games (a predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached without winning the big hit in the normal mode (normal state). In the case of the present embodiment, when the 989 game is absorbed in the general mode, the 990th game is switched to the predictive mode (see the block frame (α) of the “predictive mode” in FIG. 7). Although the details of the “ceiling” will be described later, in the present embodiment, when 1000 games (1000 rotations) are addicted to the normal mode (at least during the normal state of the internal game state) (continue to lose), the ceiling function is activated, A special profit (ceiling privilege) is provided (see the column of the example of the ceiling privilege in Note 2 of FIG. 7).

(7-1B-1. About effects in the sign mode)
During the precursor mode, the mode is shifted to the “precursor effect mode” which is an effect (effect for precursor) related to the predictive mode. During the aura effect mode, the "day background image" in which the sun shines in the general mode is switched to the "night background image" in which a star shines, so that it is informed that the aura mode is in progress. Further, it is possible to switch between the normal mode, the simple mode, and the premium mode even during the omen effect mode (see the block frame (γ) of the omen mode in FIG. 7). Further, during the precursor effect mode, for example, a countdown display appears as an effect (remaining ceiling number display effect) capable of identifying the number of remaining games (remaining ceiling number) until reaching the ceiling (in the precursor mode of FIG. 7). See the block frame (δ)). The remaining ceiling number display effect may be displayed during a part of the omen mode, and for example, the remaining ceiling number display effect may be started (countdown display start) from the 996th game near the ceiling. For example, a countdown display (e.g., suggesting a count of zero in the ceiling game) can be performed between the 996 games and the 999 games or the 995 to 1000 games including the ceiling game in consideration of the maximum number of held storages of 4. If the number of games to the ceiling is known, there is a dramatic advantage that the player can prevent wasteful hitting until the ceiling arrives.

Further, during the precursor effect mode, at least a hold display mode (hold icon) different from the general mode is displayed. For example, in the general production mode, the simple display mode is based on the simple “circular icon” shown in FIG. 5, but in the precursor production mode, the dedicated display mode is based on the “character icon”. (Block frame (ε) in the precursor mode of FIG. 7, see FIG. 32). It should be noted that, in the general mode, one or a plurality of existing pending displays immediately before the transition to the precursor mode (989th game) are simultaneously changed to a dedicated pending display (character icon) after the transition to the precursor mode (990th game). Alternatively, only the hold display to be digested may be changed to a dedicated hold display during the precursor mode. The latter configuration will be described in detail. For example, in the case where there are three operation holding balls during execution of the 988 game, the holding display relating to the 989th game to the 991th game is displayed as a “'circular icon (in the general mode. Digestion target hold: 989th game)''Chara icon (prediction mode digestion target hold: 990th game)''Chara icon (prediction mode digestion target hold: 991th game)'' Also, from the start in the precursor effect mode until the predetermined number of games have been exhausted, the same hold display (circular icon) as in the general effect mode is set, and the ceiling is approaching (for example, 996 considering the maximum hold memory number of 4). When the game is switched to the game 999), the reserved display (character icon) dedicated to the warning sign may be switched to. Further, during the omen effect mode, the "remaining ceiling number display effect" and/or the "dedicated reserved display for omen" may be displayed.

(Regarding Normal/Simple/Premium mode in the precursor mode)
While it has been described that it is possible to switch to any of the “normal/simple/premium mode” during the precursor effect mode of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the switching is not possible (in the unswitchable state). Control). That is, the player-selectable effect mode can be fixed during the precursor effect mode. For example, it is possible to fix the rendering mode that is being selected in the general mode, or forcibly fix the rendering mode to any one of the normal/simple/premium modes (for example, the default normal mode). (The same applies to Heaven mode described later). In this case, the phenomenon that the effect mode that can be switched in the general mode becomes unswitchable makes the player feel uncomfortable and allows the player to know that the ceiling is approaching. In particular, when the omen effect mode and the general effect mode are in a secret state in terms of effect (for example, the omen effect mode and the general effect mode have a common background image, the omen mode and the general effect mode are common to each other. The ceiling is reached by giving the player an uncomfortable feeling that "the production mode cannot be switched" (there is an omen mode internally, but the production mode is the general production mode) and the omen mode itself is not provided). It is possible to notify that the (ceiling game) is approaching.

(7-2. About "ST mode")
The ST mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is associated with the probability change state (YJ=01H). In this ST mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "02H", the "ST early mode", and " The "ST middle stage mode" of "03H" and the "ST end stage mode" of "04H" are included. The ST mode is shifted to when one of the probability variation big hits 1 to 7 is won.

In the case of the present embodiment, depending on which one of the probability variation big hits 1 to 7 is won, the probability mode is changed to any of the above "probability variation A" to "probability variation C", and therefore the mode of transition of the game mode is also different. Specifically, the transition modes are (A-1) to (A-3) below.

(A-1: Probability variation C (25 times of ST + 75 times of shortening time) is given to the probability variation jackpot 3, 6 (5R probability variation ST25, 7R probability variation ST25))
When the probability variation jackpot 3 or 6 is won, the probability variation C is transferred to the "probability variation C" as already described with reference to FIG. 4, and "ST number of times 25+time reduction number of times 75" is given. The transition mode of the game mode in this case is to stay in the "ST early mode" from the 1st to 25th games (early ST number) and to stay in the "time saving mode" to the 26th to 100th games (within the hour shortened number). It has become. Paying attention to a series of transition modes of "ST early mode (ST25 times) ⇒ time saving mode", the game mode transitioned when the probability variation jackpot 3, 6 is won is also referred to as "ST25 mode" (see FIG. 4).

(A-2: Probability variation jackpot (2), which gives a probability variation B (75 times of ST + 25 times of shortening time), wins the probability variation jackpot 2, 5 (5R probability variation ST75, 7R probability variation ST75)
If either of the probability variation jackpots 2 or 5 is won, the process is transferred to the "probability variation B", and "75 ST times + 25 shortening times" is given (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the mode of transition of the game mode in this case is to stay in the "ST early mode" from the 1st to 25th games (early ST number) and to the 26th to 75th games (middle ST number mode) to the "ST middle stage mode". , And stay in the "time saving mode" until the 76th to 100th games (within the time saving time). Paying attention to a series of transition modes of "ST early mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ ST middle mode (ST 50 times) ⇒ time saving mode", a game mode that is shifted when a certain probability big win 2, 5 is won is also called "ST75 mode" (See Figure 4).

(When A-3. Probability Variation A (100 ST times) is given to Probability Variation Bonus 1, 3, 7 (5R Probability Variation ST100), 10R Probability Variation ST100, Special 7R Probability Variation)
If any of the probability variation big hits 1, 3, or 7 is won, the process is shifted to the above-mentioned "probability variation A" and "100 ST times" is given (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the mode of transition of the game mode in this case is to stay in the "ST early mode" from the 1st to 25th games (early ST number) and to the 26th to 75th games (middle ST number mode) to the "ST middle stage mode". , And stay in the "ST end mode" until the 76th to 100th games (the last part of the ST number of times). Paying attention to a series of transition modes of "ST early mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ ST middle mode (ST 75 times) ⇒ ST end mode (ST 25 times)", a game mode that is shifted when a certain probability jackpot 1, 3, 7 is won Is also referred to as "ST100 mode" (see FIG. 4).

(B. Probability A to Probability C (ST25, ST75, ST100 mode)
Since the "ST number" varies depending on which of the above probability variation jackpots 1 to 7 is won, that is, which one of "probability variation A to probability variation C" is transferred, the probability support A in the probability variation A to probability variation C is in a state ( The withdrawal rate (so-called “resort rate”) of the jackpot in the probability variation state or the time saving state is also different. That is, the degree of advantage with respect to the player (profit state (profit degree) given to the player) is different. For example, in the case of setting 6 (1/189 when the probability is low and 1/63 when the probability is high), the rate of consecutive vacations of the probability change A (100 times of STs), that is, the rate of continuous vacations during ST is about 79.8%. .. In addition, as for the probability of B (“75 times of ST + 25 times of shortening time”, 100 times of electric power support), the rate of ST during medium ST is about 70%, and the rate of medium and short-term vacation is about 12.4%. Overall (75 STs + 25 hours saved) has a rate of about 73.6%. In addition, the probability of C (probability of 25 times of ST + 75 times of shortening time 100 times of electric support) is about 33% for ST during continuous vacation, about 32.8% for shorter saving time during continuous vacation. The overall rate of the condominiums (during which electric power is supported) is about 55%. In addition, the rate of extended holidays (the rate of extended holidays during medium and short term) is about 41.2%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since a plurality of probability varying big hits having different numbers of STs are provided, it is possible to make the degree of continuous play in ST different depending on the type of big hit that is won. In particular, as in the present embodiment, the number of times with power support (the number of power support) is the same (for example, 100 times), but when the ST times are different (for example, ST25 times, ST75 times, ST100 times), It is possible to make the degree of profit and the degree of condominium in the state with electric support greatly different depending on the type of jackpot that is won. As a result, the degree of freedom in game play is increased, and the fun of the game can be further improved. In addition, the degree of freedom of the effects (ST effect mode described later) related to the ST mode is improved, and the effects can be diversified.

(7-2-1. Regarding ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST end stage fluctuation state)
As described above, the “ST early mode”, “ST middle mode”, and “ST late mode” have different variation pattern selection modes (Tcode) (see FIG. 28). As a result, it is possible to select the variation pattern distribution table (see FIGS. 25 and 27) corresponding to each ST mode, and thus each ST mode can create a unique ST mode. For example, in the variation pattern distribution table for ST early mode, a variation pattern having a variation time of 2 seconds is selected with high probability, and in the variation pattern distribution table in ST middle mode, a variation pattern having a variation time of 3 seconds is high. The probability pattern is selected, and in the variation pattern distribution table in the ST end mode, the variation pattern of variation time of 4 seconds is selected with high probability, and the average variation time of the special symbols related to each ST mode (variation Variation time of the pattern), in other words, the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game (average execution time of the symbol variation display game per game or the number of executions of the symbol variation display game per unit time: hereinafter, "average Also called digestion time). The average digestion time of the symbol variation display game (average digestion time) is at least the average digestion time at the time of losing, that is, the “average variation time of the loss variation pattern” in each ST mode.

In the case of the present embodiment, the relationship of the average digestion time in the ST mode is set so as to satisfy “ST end mode<ST middle mode<ST early mode” (see FIG. 27). That is, the ST early mode is controlled under "high speed fluctuation state (fastest in all game modes (shortest average digestion time)", the ST middle mode is under "medium speed fluctuation state", and the ST end mode is under "low speed fluctuation state". .. The average digestion time (digestion speed) in each mode is not particularly limited as long as the average digestion time (digestion speed) satisfies the relationship of "ST late mode<ST mid mode<ST early mode". However, ST mode is a game mode related to the probability change state, because the "special symbol time saving function" acts in the ST mode, any variation state, at least in the symbol variation display game than the normal mode (normal state) The average digestion time is short. Each of the above-mentioned fluctuation states (high speed, medium speed, low speed fluctuation states) has the following characteristics.

The above-mentioned "high-speed fluctuation state" is mainly useful in a game mode (gaming state) that emphasizes playability, such as "increasing the average digestion speed of the game to improve time efficiency regarding progress of the game." During ST mode (probability change state), there is "electric power support state + high probability state (special symbol probability change function operation) + special figure time saving state (special symbol time saving function operation)", at least compared to the normal mode symbol variation display game The average digestion time of is relatively short, and the game state is devised so that the big hit can be easily won. Many players want to get a big hit as soon as possible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the ST early mode, a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time is easily selected, and a “high-speed variation state” is generated.

On the other hand, with respect to the above-mentioned “high-speed fluctuation state”, under the “medium-speed fluctuation state” or “low-speed fluctuation state” where a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is easily selected, the average of the symbol fluctuation display game is Although the digestion time is longer than in the "high-speed fluctuation state", the effect time can be set longer instead, which is useful for a game mode that emphasizes the game property such as "enjoy the effect".

(7-2-2. About production in ST mode)
The ST mode according to the present embodiment includes the “ST early mode”, the “ST middle mode”, and the “ST late mode” as described above. Therefore, as an effect mode (ST effect mode) corresponding to these ST modes, an effect related to "ST early phase" (ST early phase effect) appears, and "ST early effect mode" and "ST middle step""ST midfield production mode" in which the production (ST midfield production) that appears is displayed, and "ST endboard production mode" in which the production related to "ST late board" (ST late production) appears ing.

(Example of production in 7-2-3. ST mode: FIG. 29)
FIG. 29 shows an example of effects in the ST early game effect mode, the ST middle game effect mode, and the ST last game effect mode.

With reference to FIG. 29, the “ST early stage production mode” according to the present embodiment is an “underwater acoustic battle mode” that is a production that expresses the battle between submarines, and the “ST middle stage production mode” is the battle between fleets. The “surface battle mode” and the “ST end stage production mode” that are the effects that have been expressed are the “land battle mode” that is an effect that expresses the battle between tanks. In other words, the ST mode period is divided into three stages, ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST end stage, according to the number of remaining STs. In addition, the player is informed by a dynamic change of the change pattern (change of change state of high speed, middle speed, low speed) and accompanying effects (switching of background effect, notice effect, etc.). It should be noted that the display of "right-handed ⇒" shown in the figure is a launch guidance notification effect (right-handed instruction effect) that prompts the player to right-hand. Further, the hold icon is shown only in the effect example (effect example in the ST100 mode) of FIG. 7B, and (B) and (C) are omitted.

About "ST division production" which divides the production mode during the ST period, in each production mode of "ST early stage production mode", "ST middle stage production mode", "ST late stage production mode", underwater acoustic battle mode , A battle mode effect such as a surface battle mode, a land battle mode, etc. is switched, whereby the fact that the number of STs is approaching the final round is notified stepwise.

In the present embodiment, the production mode is started from the “underwater acoustic battle mode” of the ST early stage production mode, regardless of which of the probability variation big hits 1 to 7 is won. That is, the ST early production mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) is common to each ST mode (ST25, ST75, ST100 mode) as shown in the figure. However, each ST mode has a different game mode transition mode, and accordingly, the effect mode transition mode is also different.

(In ST25 mode: Fig. 29 (c))
In the ST25 mode (25 ST times + 75 hour reductions), as shown in FIG. 29C, during the 1st to 25th games, the player stays in the ST early stage production mode (underwater acoustic battle mode). When the 25th game of the final ST is completed, the game mode is changed from the ST early mode to the time saving mode, and along with this, the production mode is also changed from the ST early effect mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) to the time saving mode (between fighters). The "air battle mode" which produces the effect of expressing the battle of (the details of the time saving mode and the time saving effect mode will be described later). In this time saving mode (air battle mode), 26 games to 100 games (time saving final game) are stayed. Although not shown, at the end of the 100th game, the time saving mode ends (the state with electric support ends) and the mode shifts to the normal mode. Along with this, the effect mode also changes from the time saving effect mode to the normal effect mode. (General effect mode) is entered (the same applies to ST75 mode described later).

(In ST75 mode: Fig. 29 (b))
In the case of the ST75 mode (75 ST times + 25 time saving times), as shown in FIG. When the 25th game ends, the game mode shifts from the ST early mode to the ST midfield mode, and accordingly, the production mode also shifts from the ST early production mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) to the ST midfield production mode (surface battle mode). Thus, the player stays in the ST midfield effect mode (surface battle mode) until the 75th game. Then, when the 75th game of the final ST is finished, the game mode is shifted from the ST midfield mode to the time saving mode, and accordingly, the production mode is also changed from the ST midfield production mode (surface battle mode) to the time saving production mode (air battle mode). Will be migrated. In the ST75 mode, the game is stayed in the time saving effect mode (air combat mode) for 76 to 100 games (time saving final game).

(In ST100 mode: Fig. 29(a))
In the case of ST100 mode (100 times of ST times), as shown in FIG. 29A, up to the 75th game, the above ST75 mode is the same game mode and effect mode transition. However, when the 75th game is over, the game mode is shifted to the ST mid-stage mode and the ST late-stage mode, and accordingly, the production mode and the production mode are changed from the ST mid-stage production mode (surface battle mode) to the ST late-stage production mode (land battle mode). Will be moved to. In ST100 mode, all 100 games are in ST (probably changing) until the state with electric support is finished, and this land battle mode is a special effect mode that occurs only in ST100 mode. In addition, in ST100 mode, the background is switched in sequence in all sections of ST mode, so the tension of the player is that the production mode is underwater acoustic battle (ST early stage), water battle (ST middle stage), land battle. It gets stronger every time you switch to the mode (late ST), and becomes the strongest when you reach the land battle mode at the end of ST. Although not shown, at the end of the 100th game, the ST mode ends (the state with electric power support ends) and the mode shifts to the normal mode. Along with this, the effect mode also changes from the ST end effect effect to the normal effect. The mode is shifted to the general production mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of which jackpot is won, the "ST early mode+ST early stage production mode" is started. That is, regardless of the destination game state of the big hit game (probability variation A to probability variation C), in other words, regardless of the initial remaining ST number (ST number given), the start effect mode after the big hit game (initial The production mode) is common.

(Modifications related to ST mode: FIGS. 30 and 31)
The transitions of the ST mode and the ST effect mode in the game progress state are not limited to those in the above-described embodiment (FIG. 29), but may be configured to follow the transitions shown in the modified examples 1 and 2 below. Modifications 1 and 2 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31.

(Modification 1: ST mode: FIG. 30)
FIG. 30 shows a first modification of the ST mode according to this embodiment. In FIG. 30, the hold icon corresponding to the effect mode is omitted (the same applies to FIG. 31, which will be described later).

Also in the case of this example (variation 1), the ST mode is divided into a plurality of sections, but the start effect mode is different according to each ST mode (depending on the type of jackpot that was won), and according to the number of remaining STs. , Starting from a different staging mode.

Referring to FIG. 30, in ST100 mode, the same mode transition as in the above embodiment (FIG. 29(A)) is followed as shown in FIG. 30(A).

However, in the case of the ST75 mode (75 ST times + 25 hour reductions), paying attention to the fact that the initial remaining ST number is 75, as shown in FIG. The ST mode and the transition of the corresponding effect mode) are traced.
"Between 1 and 25 games": "ST midfield mode + ST midfield production mode (surface battle mode)"
"26 to 75 games": "ST end mode + ST end stage production mode (land battle mode)"
"From 76 to 100 games": "Time saving mode + time saving effect mode (air battle mode)"

Further, in the case of ST25 mode (25 STs + 50 hour reductions), paying attention to the fact that the initial remaining ST count is 25, as shown in FIG. It is designed to be traced.
"Between 1 and 25 games": "ST late game mode + ST late game production mode (land battle mode)"
"26 to 100 games": "Time saving mode + time saving effect mode (air battle mode)"

In this example, the "ST early mode" exists only in the ST100 mode, and the "ST middle mode" exists in the ST100 mode and the ST75 mode. The ST late mode is common to all ST modes. This example is different from the above embodiment in the following points.

In the case of this example, focusing on the changing state, in ST75 mode, since the ST middle stage mode (surface battle mode) is started, the changing state is started from the “medium speed changing state”. Further, in the ST25 mode, since the ST end mode (land battle mode) is started, the fluctuation state is started from the "low speed fluctuation state". That is, in the case of the present example, as the number of STs in which the initial number of STs is relatively small, the average variation time of the symbol variation display game is started from the game mode. Therefore, since the section (between 1 and 25 games) corresponding to the "high speed fluctuation state" in the ST early stage of the above embodiment is the section of the medium speed fluctuation state or the low speed fluctuation state, even when the number of STs is small. There is an advantage that the ST period can be enjoyed for a long time without the fear that the ST period will end in an instant.

(Modification 2 related to ST mode: FIG. 31)
FIG. 31 shows a modified example 2 of the ST effect mode according to the present embodiment. In this example, regardless of the number of STs, the common "ST effect mode" is started, and when the time saving state is entered, the "time saving mode" is entered. In the figure, an example starting from the ST middle stage mode is representatively shown.

In the case of this example, as shown in FIGS. 31A to 31B, all of the ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes are the common ST mode and ST effect mode (surface battle mode). That is, the variation pattern selection mode is the same during the ST mode (in the case of this example, "03H" in the ST middle mode), and at least the variation state (average digestion time) does not change according to the number of remaining STs. This point is significantly different from the above-described embodiment and modification 1. However, in the case of ST25 mode or ST75 mode, when the ST number of times ends, the ST mode is changed to the time saving mode (the variation pattern selection mode is updated to "05H" of the time saving mode), and accordingly, the effect mode Also shifts from the ST midfield effect mode to the time saving effect mode. In other words, in the case of ST25 and ST75 modes, the transition of the game mode (fluctuation pattern selection mode) in the state with electric support occurs, and in the case of ST100 mode, the game mode in the state with electric support (variation pattern selection mode) ) Does not occur.

In the case of this example, since the ST effect mode (ST mode) does not change according to the number of STs, for example, the number of STs is relatively small, such as “5 times, 10 times, 15 times” (low ST probability variation state). It is suitable when a plurality of types are provided. This is because, if the number of STs is small, if the effect mode or the variation pattern selection mode is changed indiscriminately, the player may feel annoyed.

In the ST mode, the "normal mode", "simple mode", and "premium mode" described in the normal mode may not be switchable, or, similarly to the normal mode, can be switched by the player. May be (same for other game modes (time saving mode and heaven mode described later)). In the case of a switchable configuration, a specific color (for example, a dark-type (Color) background display color, and the display color and pattern of the weapon image (submarine, ship, tank, fighter (in the time saving mode described later)) related to each ST mode in normal/simple/premium mode. By performing display processing such as changing in each effect mode, it is possible to identify which effect mode is switched to by this. Further, how to determine the fluctuation state (average digestion time) in each mode is arbitrary. In the present embodiment, the relationship of “ST late mode<ST mid mode<ST early mode” has been described. However, it can be configured like the variation states of Modifications 1 and 2, or “ST early mode<ST mid mode<ST late mode. As in the case of the “mode”, the relationship may be such that the fluctuation state relatively slows down according to the number of STs.

The "remaining ST number notification effect" for notifying the remaining ST number and the "remaining power support number notifying effect" for notifying the remaining power support number can have the following configurations (1) to (10).
(1) In each of the ST effect modes (each ST mode), the "residual ST number notification effect" and/or the "remaining power support frequency notification effect" can be displayed.
Further, (2) when the remaining ST number notification production is displayed, the remaining ST number of each production ST mode may be reported. For example, in the ST early mode, the countdown display is performed from the remaining 25 times. In the ST middle mode, the countdown display is performed from the remaining 50 times. In the ST late mode, the countdown display is performed from the remaining 25 times. And so on.
Further, (3) a configuration in which the remaining ST number notification effect is not displayed (a configuration in which the remaining ST number cannot be grasped) may be adopted. In this case, only the remaining power support frequency notification effect may be displayed.
Further, (4) the remaining ST number notification effect may be started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed from the start of ST. For example, the countdown display may be started from 5 games before the end of ST.
Also, (5) the remaining ST number notification effect may be displayed only in a specific ST mode. The specific ST mode may be any one of ST25, ST75, and ST100, but the player tends to enjoy the game while paying attention to the number of remaining STs, so that the ST75 or ST100 mode other than the ST25 mode may be used. It is preferable to expose it.
Further, (6) during the ST effect mode (ST mode), the remaining ST number notification effect may be displayed, and during the time saving effect mode (time saving mode), the remaining power support frequency notification effect may be displayed.
Further, (7) the remaining ST number notification effect and the remaining power support number notification effect may not be separately presented separately, but may be, for example, a countdown display combined effect mode. For example, using the same countdown display, the number display is “white” in the ST mode and “red” in the time saving mode, or a predetermined effect image ((( For example, a display with light (glow effect or shadow effect), gradation, blur, or appropriate effect image processing such as embossing) is added, but there is no effect during the time saving mode.

(About 7-3. "Time saving mode")
Returning to the explanation of FIG. The time saving mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the time saving state (YJ=02H), and in the case of this embodiment, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is one type of "05H". In the time-saving mode, in addition to the case of winning 1 or 2 (5R time-short A, 5R time-short B) in the time-saving big hit, probability variation big hits 2, 3, 5, 6 (5R probability variation ST75, 5R probability variation ST25, 7R probability variation ST75, 7R probability variation) This is a game mode that is shifted even after the number of ST times when winning in ST25) or the like is completed. After the time saving mode is completed (after the number of time saving is completed), the mode is shifted to the “normal mode” (see the upward thick arrow of the block frame in the time saving mode in FIG. 6).

(7-3-1. Regarding the fluctuation state during the time saving mode)
During the above time saving mode, "low probability (special symbol probability changing function not activated) + state with electric support + special symbol time saving state", but regarding the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game, the high speed related to the ST mode It is arbitrary whether the fluctuation state is the same as or substantially the same as the fluctuation state, the medium speed fluctuation state, or the low speed fluctuation state, or the fluctuation state has an average digestion rate different from these. However, the point of shifting to the time-saving mode also from the ST mode, specifically, in the case of the ST25 mode, it shifts from the "ST early mode (high-speed fluctuation state)" to the "time-saving mode", and in the case of the ST75 mode. Shifts to "time saving mode" through "ST early mode (high speed fluctuation state)" and "ST middle mode (medium speed fluctuation state)", and the jackpot lottery probability becomes low during the time saving mode (miss) It is preferable to position the game mode as a game mode that emphasizes playability such as "enjoying the effect" during the time-saving mode in consideration of the fact that "is frequently generated". Therefore, it is preferable to set the fluctuation state in the time saving mode (average digestion time) to "the fluctuation state in the time saving mode <the high speed fluctuation state in the ST mode", and more preferably "the fluctuation state in the time saving mode ≤ the ST mode. Medium speed fluctuation state". Like the ST mode, the time saving mode may be configured such that a plurality of time saving modes can be shifted. In this case, a plurality of fluctuation pattern selection modes for the time saving mode may be provided.

(7-3-2. About production in time saving mode)
During the time saving mode, the mode is shifted to the "time saving effect mode" in which the effect related to "during the time saving state" appears. The time saving effect mode is an "air battle mode" that creates an effect expressing a battle between fighters, and is distinguished from each of the game modes in the ST mode (ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST late stage mode). In the present embodiment, in addition to the case where the time saving big hits 1 and 2 are won, when the probability changing big hits 2, 3, 5 and 6 are shifted to the time saving mode after the end of ST, both are shifted to the same time saving effect mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to shift to a time-saving production mode in which different effects are produced between the time-saving big hit 1 and the time-saving big hit 2 (for example, a time-saving A production mode when one time-saving big hit is won, and a time-shortening B production mode when two time saving big hits are won). .. Further, different time saving effect modes may be used in the time saving effect mode at the time saving big hit and in the time saving effect mode after the end of ST at the time of the probability variation big hit (time saving effect mode according to ST25 and ST75).

(7-4. "Ceiling mode": Fig. 7)
Next, the “ceiling mode” will be described with reference to FIG. 7. In the present embodiment, a "ceiling function" is provided as a relief function in the event of a major failure. This ceiling function is a function of giving a predetermined profit state (ceiling privilege) in order to save the player when a predetermined number of games (a predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached without winning the jackpot. The ceiling privilege is provided with a profit state that is more advantageous than at least the normal state in terms of the hamari relief function. The ceiling game number of this embodiment is the 1000th game in the normal mode as the number of games (ceiling game number) in consideration of the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability of the settings 1 to 6 (three times that at the low probability). The ceiling mode is a game mode that occurs in the 1000th game. It should be noted that what value the ceiling game number is set to can be appropriately determined. For example, when the jackpot lottery probability in the normal state is a "sweet digital type" with a relatively high probability (around 1/100), the number of ceiling games can be set to about 300 to 500 games. In the present embodiment, the ceiling game number is the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ceiling game can be different for all or some of the set values. For example, different ceiling games may be set in the settings 1 to 6 (for example, 1100 games to 1050 games: the higher the set value, the smaller the ceiling games are), or the high setting area (settings 4 to 6) has 1000 ceiling games. The game may be a medium/low setting area (settings 1 to 3) may be 1032 games, or only a specific setting value (for example, setting 6 of the highest setting) may have a ceiling game number different from other setting values.

First, the types of ceiling benefits will be described. As the type of ceiling privilege, as shown in the list of “Example of ceiling privilege” in Note 2 of FIG. 7, for example, “infinite time reduction”, “finite time reduction”, “infinite probability variation”, “finite probability variation”, There are "infinite latent accuracy", "finite latent accuracy", "forced hit", etc. These benefits are roughly classified into "infinite time reduction" and "finite time reduction" as "ceiling time reduction type", "infinite probability variation" and "finite probability variation" as "ceiling probability variation type", "infinite latent probability" and "finite latent probability". “Sure” is a ceiling privilege belonging to “ceiling latent classification”, and “compulsory hit” is a ceiling privilege belonging to “ceiling hit classification”. Hereinafter, these ceiling privilege types will be sequentially described.

(Infinite time saving)
(A) "Infinite time saving" is a privilege to give a time saving state until the next big hit. In the case of infinite time reduction, the number of time reductions is “no limit on number of times (infinite)”. Even when there is no possibility of ending the time saving state (when it is safe to think that it is 0%) or when giving an indigestible time saving number within the business hours of the pachinko hall (for example, 65536 times), In the present invention, it can be treated as belonging to infinite time.

(Limited time saving)
(B) “Limited time saving” is to give a time saving state within a predetermined number of time saving so that an appropriate jackpot winning rate is achieved. In this respect, it is different from the aforementioned infinite time saving, which has no limit number of times. As a typical example of the time saving number to be given, for example, the same time saving number 100 times as the time saving large hits 1 and 2, or the time saving number 75 times is given, but it is not limited to giving the same time saving number as the time saving large hit, but different time saving. The number of times (for example, 75 times, 150 times, 200 times, etc.) can be given. It should be noted that, even when the number of time reductions that is “substantially until the next big hit” in the above “infinite time reduction” is given, it can be said that it belongs to this finite time reduction in that there is a limit on the number of times. Can be treated as belonging to infinite time.

(Specific example of giving a finite time)
Here, in the case of giving a finite time shortening, the following giving forms (1) to (4) (finite time shortening giving forms 1 to 4) can be adopted.

(Form 1 of limited time reduction)
(1) There are multiple types (number of types A) of shortening times due to jackpots (number of shortening times given due to jackpot winning (number of hours shortening)), but types of shortening times due to ceiling benefits (number of hours shortening) are more than that. Decide on a small number (type number B). Specifically, it is configured to satisfy the relationship of “the number of types B<the number of types A”.

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, there are two types of shortening times due to a big hit, that is, 100 times (shortening hours A) and 50 times (shortening hours B) (the number of types A). Then, it is configured such that only one type of time saving time 100 times (time saving A) is given. In addition, if the relationship of “the number of types B<the number of types A” is satisfied, the number of times of shortening (for example, 150 times) different from the number of times of shortening due to a big hit may be given. When two or more types of time saving times (time saving state) due to the ceiling privilege are provided (“2≦type number B<type number A”), one of the time saving times (time saving state) ) Can be configured to be determinable.

(Limited time saving form 2)
(2) When there are a plurality of types of time saving times (time saving state) by ceiling privilege, one of the time saving times (time saving state) is determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling privilege drawing).
For example, it can be determined by a lottery from a plurality of shortened times (50 and 100 times in the present embodiment) given due to the jackpot winning. In this case, the number of times saved can be the same as that of a big hit. Of course, it may be determined by a lottery among a plurality of shortening times (for example, 100 times, 75 times and 25 times) including a shortening time number different from the saving time number given due to the jackpot winning. In this case, a time saving number different from the big hit may be given. In addition, the lottery probability (selection rate) of the ceiling privilege type (here, each time saving number) to be lottery may be the same or substantially the same, or all or part of them may be different. Further, the lottery target may include “ceiling privilege loss” that does not grant the ceiling privilege. When the ceiling privilege loss is included, the ceiling privilege is not always granted even when the game reaches the ceiling game, but in this case, “execution of the ceiling privilege lottery” serves as a hamari relief function.

Alternatively, the lottery probability may be set according to the “set value”, and the number of times saved (time saving state) may be determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling privilege lottery corresponding to the set value). For example, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of times (time saving state). That is, the higher the set value, the more easily the privilege having a relatively high degree of profit is given (the same applies to other ceiling privileges described later). Specifically, when “100 times, 75 times, 50 times” is set as the type of time saving frequency, when these lottery probabilities are “setting 1”, “25%, 35%, 40%”, “setting” In the case of 6", it is "45%, 30%, 25%" or the like. However, conversely, in consideration of the fact that the lower the set value is, the greater the possibility of a large sum will be, it may be configured such that a relatively large number of time reductions are easily selected as the set value becomes lower. That is, the lower the set value, the more easily the privilege having a relatively high profit degree is given (the same applies to other ceiling privileges described later). Further, the configuration may be such that “a specific set value is fixed when a specific ceiling privilege is given”. For example, when the time saving number of 25 times is given, “setting 6 is confirmed” and when 75 times is given, “setting 4 or more is decided”. As described above, the ceiling privilege determination method related to the set value can provide the player with useful information that is a setting estimation element, and thus is useful for improving the player's willingness to play the game when they encounter a hamari.

(Form 3 of limited time reduction)
(3) When the average number of shortening times due to a big reduction in hour and hour is N and the number of average shortening times due to the ceiling privilege is M, the following equations (1) to (3) can be satisfied.
(Formula 1) It is configured so as to satisfy the relationship of “average shortening times N<average shortening times M”. In the case of the present embodiment, the average number of shortening times N due to a big hit is 75, so the number of average shortening times due to the ceiling privilege M is set to be a larger number than this. In the case of this example, since the ceiling benefit has a relatively higher profit degree than a normal jackpot win, it is a nice benefit for a player who has a big humor and whose game motivation is significantly reduced. Note that the average shortened number of times M may be an infinite number. When the average number of shortened times M is set to an infinite number, it is equivalent to the case where the above "infinite number of shortened times" is given.
(Formula 2) It is configured so as to satisfy the relationship of “average shortening times N=average shortening times M”. In this case, the profit degree by the big hit (the number of times of shortening) and the profit degree by the ceiling privilege are equal.
(Formula 3) It is configured so as to satisfy the relationship of “average shortening times N>average shortening times M”. In this case, the degree of profit by the big hit is relatively lower than the degree of profit by the ceiling privilege, and it is possible to prevent excessive privilege grant.

(Form 4 of limited time reduction)
(4) As in the case of the above (Formula 3), paying attention to the point that excessive privilege is not given, the number of time saving is set to satisfy at least the relationship of “the number of time saving by ceiling privilege≦the maximum number of time saving by jackpot”. According to the present embodiment, the number of times saved due to the ceiling privilege is equal to or less than the number of times saved for “time saving A” by the time saving big hit 1, for example, 100 times or 90 times. Further, focusing on the minimum number of times of shortening due to a big hit, the number of times of shortening may satisfy a relation of “minimum number of times of shortening due to a big hit≦number of times of shortening due to ceiling privilege<maximum number of times of shortening due to a big hit”. According to the present embodiment, the number of times saved by the ceiling privilege is equal to or greater than the number of times saved by the time saved by the time saving big hit 2 and less than the number of times saved by the time saving big hit 1 by the time saving big hit 1, for example, 50 times or 60 times.

(Infinite probability variation)
(C) "Infinite probability variation" is a privilege that gives a probability variation state until the next big hit. In the case of infinite probability variation, the number of STs is “no limit on number of times (infinite)”, but like the same phenomenon as the above “infinite time reduction”, the number of STs that substantially reaches the next big hit (for example, 10,000 times). Or 65536 times).

(Finite probability variation)
(D) The "finite probability variation" is different from the infinite probability variation described above, and is to give a probability variation state up to a predetermined number of STs so that an appropriate jackpot winning rate is achieved. For example, as with the probability variation big hits 1 to 7, the number of STs is 100 times, 75 times, 25 times, or the like. Of course, the number of STs of the probability variation big hits 1 to 7 need not be the same, and 50 or 150 times may be given. It should be noted that even when the number of STs that is “substantially until the next big hit” in the above “infinite probability variation” is given, it can be said that it belongs to this finite probability variation due to the number of times limitation, but it is the same as “infinite time saving” above. Like an elephant, it may be treated as belonging to infinite probability variation or may be treated as belonging to finite probability variation (the same applies to infinite latent probability described later).

(Specific example when adding finite probability variation)
Here, in the case of giving a finite probability variation, as in the same phenomenon as the contents described in the finite time reduction granting modes 1 to 4 of the above "finite time saving", the following ceiling privilege granting modes (finite probability changing granting modes) 1 to It can be 4. In the finite probability variation imparting modes 1 to 4 described below, the “time saving number” and the “time saving state” described in the above “finite time reduction imparting modes 1 to 4” are appropriately replaced with “probability variation state” and the like. Since it is substantially the same as the content (concept), the description will be omitted while omitting the content as appropriate in order to avoid redundant description for convenience of description.

(Limited Probability Variation Form 1)
(1) There are a plurality of types of STs (probability variation state) that are given due to a big hit (the number of types A), but the number of STs (probability variation state) due to a ceiling privilege is less than that. The number of types is B), that is, the number of types B<the number of types A is satisfied.

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the number of STs (probability variation state) given to the probability variation jackpot due to winning is 100 times (probability variation A), 75 times (probability variation B), 25 times (probability variation C). ), the ceiling privilege, for example, is configured to give only one type of ST number 100 times (probability variation A).

(Limited Probability Variation Form 2)
(2) When there are a plurality of types of the ST number (probably changed state) due to the ceiling privilege, one of the ST numbers (probably changed state) is determined by a predetermined lottery. This point is substantially the same as the content obtained by appropriately replacing "the number of time reductions" with "the number of STs" and "the time reduction state" described in "(Limited time reduction provision mode 2)" in the above-mentioned finite time reduction. Is.

(Limited Probability Change Form 3)
(3) When the average ST number N of the ST numbers due to the probability variation big hit and the average ST number M due to the ceiling privilege are set, it is possible to satisfy the following equations (4) to (6). With respect to these (Equation 4) to (Equation 6) as well, the wording such as “time saving number” of (Equation 1) to (Equation 3) described in “(Limited time reduction assignment mode 3)” in the above finite time reduction is referred to as “ST number of times”. Is substantially the same as the content replaced by the wording such as "."
(Formula 4) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of “average ST number N<average ST number M”. The average ST number M may be an infinite number. When the average ST number M is set to an infinite number, it is equivalent to the case where the above “infinite probability variation” is given.
(Formula 5) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of “average ST number N=average ST number M”.
(Equation 6) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of “average ST number N>average ST number M”.

(Limited Probability Variation Form 4)
(4) Focusing on the point that excessive privilege is not given, the number of STs is determined so as to satisfy at least the relationship of “number of STs by ceiling privilege≦maximum number of STs by big hit”. In the present embodiment, the number of STs due to the ceiling privilege is equal to or less than the number of STs due to the probability variation big hit 1 or the like, for example, 100 times or 90 times. Further, paying attention to the minimum ST number by the big hit, the ST number may satisfy the relation of “minimum ST number by the big hit≦ST number by the ceiling privilege<maximum ST number by the big hit”. In the present embodiment, the number of STs due to the ceiling privilege is equal to or more than the number of STs due to the probability variation big hit 6 or the like and less than the number of STs due to the probability variation big hit 1 or the like, for example, 25 times, 50 times, 75 times (the same number of STs as ST75), etc. Is.

(Infinite accuracy)
(E) "Infinite latent probability" is a privilege that gives the latent probability state until the next big hit. In the case of infinite latent probability, the number of STs is “no limit on number of times (infinite)”. Good.

(Limited accuracy)
(F) The “finite latent probability” is different from the infinite latent probability described above, and is a condition in which the latent probability is given within a predetermined number of STs so as to obtain an appropriate winning rate. In the present embodiment, the latent probability big hit that triggers the transition to the latent probability state is not provided, but if a part of the probability variation big hit is the latent probability big hit, the finite probability variation imparting mode 1 described in the finite probability variation. It is possible to adopt a configuration similar to that of (4) to (4) (configuration related to the number of STs). In this respect, since the content is substantially the same as the finite probability variation (the content of the “probability variation state” is appropriately replaced by the “latent probability state” language), detailed description is omitted to avoid duplicate description. ..

(Forced hit)
(G) "Forced win" is to forcibly give the big hit regardless of the big hit lottery. "Unrelated to the big hit lottery" means that the big hit lottery itself is not executed, or even if the big hit lottery is executed, the result is treated as invalid and the big hit lottery is irrelevant. The meaning is not limited.

The types of big hits due to forced hits are either probability variation big hits (finite probability variation big hits, infinite probability variation big hits), time shortening big hits (finite time shortening big hits, infinite time shortening big hits), or latent probability big hits (finite latent probability big hits, infinite probability big hits). It may be. Also, the maximum number of rounds or the round game mode can be appropriately determined. Also, the destination game state after the forced hit can be appropriately determined. For example, it may be the same destination game state as that when the big hit shown in FIG. 4 is won (for example, time saving A, time saving B, or probability variation (ST) A to C), and the finite time saving explained in the above ceiling privilege. You may make it transfer to the game state similar to grant form 1-4, limited probability variation grant form 1-4, etc.

However, in order not to give an excessive privilege, as a forced win, one of the big hit lottery targets (in the present embodiment, one of the probability variation big hits 1 to 7 and the reduced working hour big hits 1 to 2 is a big hit). ) Is preferable. More preferably, the profit degree should not be higher than the total jackpot. The term "profit" here means "profit from a big hit game" or "profit including a big hit game and a destination game state". In the present embodiment, it is preferable to satisfy at least the relationship of “profit due to compulsory hit≦probability due to probability variation big hit 4 (big hit with the highest profit degree among all big hits)”.

The ceiling privilege described above can be provided with a profit equal to or different from the profit degree given by the jackpot lottery result, and is therefore useful as a salvage relief function.

Although various ceiling privileges have been described above, which ceiling privilege is adopted is arbitrary. In addition, as the ceiling privilege, a plurality of types of privileges having different personalities are provided (for example, finite time saving and finite probability variation), or benefits having the same character but different advantages (profit state) (for example, finite time 100 times finite). It is possible to provide a plurality of types such as a time saving A and a finite time saving B having 50 times. In this case, what kind of ceiling privilege (two or more ceiling privileges) to be provided can be appropriately determined. For example, it is possible to determine which ceiling privilege is to be provided by a predetermined lottery by providing a finite time limit and a finite probability variation. In this case, although the same lottery probability may be used regardless of the set value, it is preferable to determine the lottery probability according to the set value, as in the above-mentioned "ceiling privilege lottery". Specifically, the higher the set value, the more easily the privilege with a relatively high degree of profit (for example, the "finite probability variation" side when lotting a finite time reduction and a finite probability variation) is easily given, or conversely, The higher the set value, the more easily the privilege with a relatively low degree of profit (for example, the “limited time-short side” in the case of drawing a finite time limit and a finite probability variation) can be easily given. In the case of a hit, the above-mentioned case of “providing a plurality of types of benefits having different personalities” includes, for example, a case of “providing at least two of a time saving big hit, a probability variation big hit, and a latent probability big hit”. However, in the case of "providing multiple types of benefits with different advantages (profit statuses)", for example, "a case of providing a plurality of big hits (time saving big hits) having different time saving times" or "a plurality of big hits having different ST counts (probable variation big hits)" Or there is a case of "providing a latent big hit)".

Further, after the ceiling privilege is given, the game state (game mode) related to the ceiling privilege is controlled until the ceiling privilege is exhausted or until the jackpot is won. Specifically, if it is a "finite system privilege" such as finite time saving, finite probability variation, or finite latent probability, without winning the big hit, when the specified time saving number or ST number is over, or the big hit is won In this case, the ceiling privilege is not granted until the mode is shifted to the normal mode (normal state) and the trigger for activating the ceiling (ceiling game) arrives again. On the other hand, in the case of an "infinite system privilege" such as infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation, or infinite latent probability, the privilege state is continued until the next big hit, and the bonus state is ended by winning the big hit.

In addition, when the ceiling privilege is a finite probability variation, it is a “finite probability variable time-short type” ceiling privilege that shifts to a time saving state (finite time or infinite time) when the specified number of STs is finished, such as ST75 mode or ST25 mode. May be. The "finitely definite variable time-short type" includes the following types (A) to (D).
(A) Ceiling privilege of “finite probability variation/limited time reduction” type that shifts to a finite time reduction (for example, 100 time reductions) when the specified ST number (75 times, for example) ends.
(Otsu) A "finitely probable variation/infinite time reduction" ceiling benefit that shifts to infinite time reduction after the specified ST times.
(H) When the first prescribed ST number (for example, 75 times) ends, only the electric support state ends, and the second prescribed ST number (for example, 100 times) shifts to a finite latent probability. Type ceiling privilege (the first prescribed ST number and the second prescribed ST number may be the same number or different numbers).
(Ding) Ceiling privilege of "finite accuracy variation/infinite latent accuracy" type, in which only the electric power support state ends when the specified ST times (for example, 75 times) are completed, and the infinite accuracy changes.

Returning to the description of the ceiling mode in FIG. Here, a configuration will be described as a typical example in which “finite time saving” (100 times of maximum time saving due to a big hit) is adopted as a ceiling privilege.

The ceiling mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to a time saving state or a probability variation state according to the ceiling privilege, but here, an example in which "finite time saving" is given is explained, so the ceiling mode is , It becomes a game mode related to a time saving state (YJ=01H). However, in the ceiling mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to the dedicated “06H” in order to select the variation pattern dedicated to the ceiling. Here, when the ceiling is reached (at the time of the ceiling game), a relatively long variation time variation pattern (ceiling variation pattern) is selected in order to secure a production time width of “ceiling production” described later. There is. In the present embodiment, the longest variation pattern is selected in all game modes (all variation pattern selection mode) (see the "Ceiling variation" column in FIG. 26). The ceiling variation pattern is not particularly limited as long as the production time width of the “ceiling production” can be secured, but a variation pattern having a variation time of at least SP reach in the normal mode (at least pseudo splice without SP reach) is available. It is preferable to be configured to be selectable.

Since the 1000th game (ceiling game) is also performed as usual, the jackpot lottery is executed. Therefore, when the 1000th game is won, the jackpot game is started as usual after the 1000th game. Become. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game is accidentally won in a big hit, the ceiling function is activated (prohibited) (see the ceiling activation management process of FIG. 13 described later). ), when the ceiling privilege is given, the 1000th game is a "miss" (if a small hit is provided, it is a small hit or a lose). This point is not limited to the case where the ceiling privilege is finite time shortening, and is the same when the ceiling privilege is infinite time shortening, infinite probability variation, finite probability variation, infinite latent probability, or finite latent probability. However, if the ceiling benefit is "forced win", the jackpot is forcibly controlled to win the jackpot, so the 1000th game jackpot lottery itself is not executed, or even if the jackpot lottery is executed, the result is invalid. It should be handled and treated as if the big jackpot for the ceiling was won. Therefore, if the ceiling privilege is "compulsive jackpot", the jackpot game (compulsory jackpot game) related to the jackpot for the ceiling is started after the 1000th game, just like when the regular jackpot is won. Becomes In addition, the hitting performance during the compulsory jackpot game may be the same as the normal jackpot (the same as any one of the time saving jackpot 1 and the probability variation jackpot 1 to 7), or the hitting jackpot effect dedicated to the jackpot jackpot is displayed. May be.

(7-4-1. About production in ceiling mode)
During the ceiling mode, the state is shifted to the "ceiling stage mode" in which the stage effect (ceiling stage) for notifying the arrival of the ceiling is displayed. This ceiling effect mode is an effect mode dedicated to the ceiling (1000th game), and in the case of the present embodiment, it is an effect mode for only one game (one rotation). As an example of the effect in the ceiling effect mode, for example, a decorative pattern at the time of ceiling (decorative pattern for the ceiling) is different from at least the normal mode (numerals 1 to 9). The reason for "at least a decorative pattern different from the normal mode" is that the ceiling is reached when a large Hamari is encountered in the normal mode, and a decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern that has long appeared in the normal mode. This is because it is appropriate to let them appear and notify the arrival of the ceiling.

The decorative pattern for the ceiling is specifically a special pattern (a decorative pattern for the ceiling) that displays a special character, item, or character, and the decorative pattern for the ceiling may be a design that has a strong impact. Preferably, for example, the decorative pattern 778 (decorative pattern of "heaven" "☆" "well") shown in Note 1 of FIG. 7 is used. Ordinary decorative symbol rows are three of a right symbol, a middle symbol, and a left symbol (see FIG. 5), but the ceiling decorative symbol column does not necessarily have to be three symbol columns. For example, it may be four symbol rows of "heaven", "well", "arriving", and "tachi", or two symbol rows of "heaven" and "well". Further, in order to emphasize that the ceiling has been reached, a huge decorative pattern having a larger display area than a normal decorative pattern or one with a predetermined effect image may be used. Regarding the decorative pattern related to the ceiling game, when the variable display is used, the normal decorative pattern is used (all or part of the decorative pattern is the same), and only the decorative pattern to be finally stopped (decorative stop pattern) is used as the ceiling decorative pattern. Good.

In addition, a dedicated character image 777 appears as a background display of the decorative pattern. This character image 777 is a special effect that appears only in the ceiling game. In addition, as one of the characteristic effects, a "right hitting instruction image 779 (shooting guide notification effect)" that prompts right hitting is displayed when the pattern variation display game is started.

The reason why the right-handed instruction image 779 appears is as follows. When a finite time reduction is given as a ceiling benefit (the same applies when an infinite time reduction, a finite probability variation, or an infinite probability variation is also given), the "electric power support state" occurs at the start of the 1000th game. Therefore, it is to immediately inform that the right-handedness is advantageous and not to give a disadvantage to the player. In the present embodiment, the right-hand hitting instruction image 779 appears at the same time or almost at the same time as the start of the symbol variable display game. In consideration of the fact that the “state with electric support” occurs at the time of the ceiling (1000th game), during the omen mode or a part of the period (for example, the game immediately before the ceiling game (final mode of the omen mode)), It is preferable that an effect (preliminary launch guidance notification effect) for notifying that the player will be "right-handed" will appear shortly.

Further, in the case of “miss” in the symbol variable display game at the time of the ceiling (1000th game), it is preferable not to show a specific notice effect. For example, at least the high-anticipation notice effect does not appear, or at least one of the pseudo-relationship, the reach effect, and the player participation type effect does not appear. The reason for this is that there is no need for a noisy notice production that inspires the expectation of winning the jackpot at the ceiling. However, this is not the case when a pseudo-relation, a reach effect, or a player participation type effect is provided as the notice effect dedicated to the ceiling mode (ceiling game). However, in any case, it is preferable not to show the notice effect that will drive the expectation of winning, so if you want to show the notice effect such as pseudo-relation, reach effect, or player participation type effect, you can use other effect. It is preferable to use a ceiling-only effect mode, which is different from the effect mode that appears in the mode. In addition, a setting suggestion effect may be displayed as a benefit of reaching the ceiling. This is because giving useful information to the player, which is a setting guess element, is useful for improving the player's willingness to play a game that encounters Hamari. When the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the ceiling, the appearance rate may be 100% or may be displayed by a predetermined lottery.

On the other hand, in the ceiling game (1000th game), when the jackpot is accidentally won, the effect related to the ceiling effect mode is not displayed but in the normal effect mode (for example, in the general mode or the omen mode). The notice effect that can appear at the time of jackpot winning is related (see the column “Ceiling” in FIG. 24). This is because if the effect for the ceiling is made to appear even in the case of a big hit in the ceiling game, it becomes unclear whether the big hit or the ceiling privilege is given, and the player is confused.

(7-5. Heaven mode)
The heaven mode is a game mode that is shifted to the next game (1001st game) of the ceiling game, and the internal game state becomes a game mode related to a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc. according to the ceiling privilege, but here Since the example in which the "finite time saving (100 times of time saving)" is given has been described, the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the time saving state (YJ = 01H). Further, during the heaven mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to the dedicated "07H" in order to select the variation pattern dedicated to heaven. It should be noted that the transition to the heaven mode is a case of a ceiling privilege other than "forced hit" (finite time, infinite time, infinite probability variation, finite probability variation, infinite latent probability, or finite latent probability).

The heaven mode is ended when the jackpot is won or when the stipulated time saving number or the ST number is finished without winning the jackpot if the ceiling bonus of the limited system is won. Here, the ceiling privilege is described as "limited time saving (100 times saving time)", so in heaven mode, when 100 times saving time is over, or when the big hit is won during the time saving digestion. It will be terminated. Then, when the heaven mode is finished, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. If the ceiling benefit is finite probability variation or finite latent probability, it will be terminated when the number of STs is completed or when the jackpot is won within the number of STs. In some cases, it will end when the big hit is won.

(7-5-1. Fluctuating state related to heaven mode)
Here, during the heaven mode, any of the above-mentioned fluctuation states such as the high-speed fluctuation state, the medium-speed fluctuation state, and the low-speed fluctuation state can be adopted. However, it is preferable to determine the changing state during the heaven mode according to the ceiling privilege type. For example, when the ceiling privilege is limited time or infinite time, it is preferable to position the game mode as a game mode that emphasizes the game property such as "enjoy the performance" as in the time mode. That is, the fluctuation state in the heaven mode when the finite time is shortened or the infinite time is given is "the fluctuation state in the heaven mode <the high speed fluctuation state in the ST mode" or "the fluctuation state in the heaven mode ≤ the medium speed fluctuation state in the ST mode. It is preferable that However, in the case of applying infinite time reduction, considering that there is no limitation on the number of time reductions, the high speed fluctuation state may be set.

On the other hand, when the finite probability variation or the infinite probability variation is applied, the jackpot selection probability is high in addition to the state with electric support, so the variation state may be the same or substantially the same as the high-speed variation state in the ST mode. preferable. On the other hand, in the case of infinite latent probability or limited latent probability, the big hit lottery probability is high, but since it is controlled under the condition without electric support, it becomes difficult to generate the operation holding ball like the normal state. .. Considering this point, in the case of applying infinite latent probability or finite latent probability, the fluctuation state is the same as or almost the same as the normal mode, or at least the fluctuation state slower than the time saving mode (the fluctuation state in which the average digestion time is relatively long) ) Is preferable. That is, the relation is set such that “variation state in normal mode≦infinity latent probability or variation state in finite latent probability<variation state in time saving mode”.

(7-5-2. About production in heaven mode)
During the heaven mode, the mode is shifted to the "heaven mode", which is an effect related to the heaven mode (a heaven effect). This heaven production mode is a production mode dedicated to the next game on the ceiling and thereafter (1001st game and thereafter), and is ended when the heaven mode is finished. During this heaven production mode, the background display is switched to a special background display different from the other game modes (for example, a "space background image" representing outer space) to notify that it is in heaven mode.

When a finite time limit or an infinite time limit is given as the ceiling benefit, the “time saving effect mode (air battle mode)” related to the time saving state may be adopted as the heaven effect mode.

In addition, when a finite probability variation, an infinite probability variation, a finite latent probability, or an infinite latent probability is given as the ceiling privilege, the above-mentioned "ST effect mode" related to the probability changed state may be adopted as the heaven production mode. In this case, similar to the ST effect mode, the ST effect mode may be changed to a different ST effect mode according to the number of ST digestions. Specifically, depending on the number of ST digestion, the production mode is sequentially set as "ST production early mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) ⇒ ST production midfield mode (water battle mode) ⇒ ST production final mode (land battle mode)". Can be migrated. In the case of infinite probability variation or infinite latent probability, there is no limit on the number of STs, so after the ST 101st time, the ST end stage production mode may be continued as it is, or a new ST production mode (ST continuous production mode) which is separately provided. You may move to. Further, it is also possible to return to the ST effect early mode at the ST101 and loop the transition of "ST effect early mode ⇒ ST effect middle mode ⇒ ST effect end mode" again.

Further, during the heaven production mode, it may be configured such that it can be switched to any one of the normal/simple/premium mode as in the same phenomenon as the contents of the “precursor production mode” and the “ST production mode” already described. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that switching between normal/simple/premium mode is impossible (control is performed in a non-switchable state).

In addition, as a part of the remedy for the player who has a great dismay, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect may be set to be a high probability during the heaven mode than in the other game modes. For example, the heaven mode should be configured so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestive effect (the setting suggestive effect that can appear during the pattern variation display game) has a higher probability than at least the normal mode (general mode and/or omen mode). You can In particular, when the ceiling privilege is a privilege accompanied by a state with electric support (a ceiling privilege other than infinite latent probability and finite latent likelihood), it is placed under a high base state in heaven mode, so the player has his own ball (game It is possible to proceed with the game without significantly reducing the game medium owned by the person or the game value equivalent thereto, or while maintaining the current state. For this reason, some players can get useful information by eating Hamari instead of normal mode, such as "You may eat some Hammer until you see the setting suggestion production". It is thought that there are many players who want to do so. In consideration of such a point, it is preferable that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is changed with a high probability during the heaven mode to function as the “setting suggestion appearance chance zone”. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the game after the summary.

<8. About game progress form: Figure 6, Figure 7>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, a specific game progression mode relating to the gaming machine 1 will be described, focusing on the game mode transition control and the effect surface.

It should be noted that, about how to hit the game, which is advantageous situation basically changes according to the internal game state (in the case of paying attention to the game mode, it is related to the internal game state). It changes according to the game mode). As described above, in the normal state (normal mode), the "left hitting" aiming at the game ball so as to pass through the leftward flow path 3b is advantageous, and the probability variation state (ST mode) or the time saving state ( In the time saving mode, the ceiling mode, and the heaven mode), "right hitting" in which the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the rightward flow path 3c is advantageous. In the following description, it is assumed that the player follows an advantageous way of striking according to the gaming state, and unless otherwise specified, in the case of left-handed striking (normal state), “the symbol variation display game 1 on the special diagram 1 side” Will be executed, and in the case of a right-handed advantage (probability change state, time saving state), the "variable symbol display game 2 on the special figure 2 side" will be executed. Further, the game mode will be described as being started from the "normal mode" which is the initial game mode.

When the big hit is won in the normal mode, the so-called "first hit" is given, and the big hit game corresponding to the big hit is started (see the block frame of "first hit" in FIG. 6). The way of hitting during the big hit is "right hitting", which aims at the big winning opening 50 side.

If we win by paying attention to the production side, in the normal mode, when the probability variation big hit 1 (5R probability variation ST100: special profit 1 side maximum profit big hit) is won, the decorative symbols stop at "7 symbol alignment (777)". Then, you will be informed that you have won the jackpot that brings the highest profit. In the winning production during the probability variation big hit 1 win, "ST entry confirmation production" that definitely informs the ST mode entry appears, and the transition confirmation to the ST100 mode is announced. After the big hit game, the ST100 mode is entered.

On the other hand, in the normal mode, when the probability variation big hits 2, 3 and the time saving big hits 1, 2 are won, the decorative symbols are stopped at a position other than “7 symbol alignment”, and in the present pattern variation display game, it is the probability variation big hit. It is not reported whether or not it is a short-time jackpot. When the game is stopped at a position other than "7 symbol alignment", a "ST rush challenge effect" of player participation type effect is developed in the hitting effect during the big hitting game thereafter, and the jackpot type is notified by the effect result. .. In this ST rush challenge production, if the success production is revealed, it is definitely notified that it is the probability variation big hit, and if the failure production is presented, it is the time saving big hit. In addition, there are two types of success effects, "Great success effect" and "Normal success effect". If "Great success effect" appears, it means that you have won the probability variation jackpot 2 (ST75 mode). However, when the "normal success effect" appears, it is notified that the probability variation big hit 3 (ST25 mode) has been won. On the other hand, there are two types of failure productions, "great failure production" and "normal failure production", and when "great failure production" appears, time saving big hit 2 (time saving B: 50 times saving) When the "normal failure effect" is displayed, it is notified that the winning time is 1 per hour (time saving A: 100 times per hour).

If you win the probability variation big hit 1-3, after the big hit game, it shifts to the corresponding ST mode (see the block frame of ST mode in FIG. 6), if you win the short-time big hit 1-2, after the big hit game , The mode is changed to the time saving mode (see the block frame of the time saving mode in FIG. 6). Then, during the ST mode and the time saving mode, as described above, the "right-handed advantage" is obtained, and the symbol variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side is executed. When the big hit is won on the special map 2 side, as shown in FIG. 4, all are the probable variation big hits, so long as the big hit is continued during the ST mode or the time saving mode, the ST mode loops and a big profit for the player. Is brought to you.

When any of the probability variation big hits 4 to 7 is won in the ST mode, the decorative design according to the big hit type is stopped and displayed. For example, if you win the "probability change jackpot 4 (10R probability change ST100)" of the maximum profit jackpot on the special map 2 side (the maximum jackpot among all the jackpots), a special decorative pattern that is not displayed in the normal mode (for example, numbers Not the design, but the design that displays the character) stops and celebrates the jackpot win. In addition, if you win "Probability variation jackpot 5 (7R confirmation variation ST75)", which has a lower profit rate than Probability variation jackpot 4 (10R confirmation variation ST100), but profit degree is higher than Probability variation jackpot 6 (7R confirmation variation ST25), "Odd" The "symbol matching" is stopped, and when the "probability variation big hit 6 (7R probability variation ST25)" with the lowest profit degree is won, the "even symbol matching" is stopped. In addition, during the big hit game, a hitting effect according to the big hit type appears.

(About the case of winning "Probably strange jackpot 7 (special 7R sure variation)")
However, when the "probability variation jackpot 7 (special 7R probability variation)" is won, "odd symbol alignment" or "even symbol alignment" is stopped and displayed with a predetermined probability. If the even number of symbols is won to stop, in the subsequent big hit game, at least a part of the above-mentioned probability variation big hit 5 (7R probability variation ST25) and/or probability variation jackpot 6 (7R probability variation ST75) is produced. Information about the probability variation big hit 7 wins (for example, confirmation of plunge into ST mode (ST100 mode)) is announced (promotion) at a predetermined timing of the hitting performance, for example, during a particular round performance or ending performance. Will be announced). As a result, even if "even number of patterns" is stopped, the possibility of entering the ST100 mode, which can expect high profit, is left, and the expectation of entering the ST mode can be fueled in the hitting performance. Has become.

However, in the hitting performance, the same (same) hitting performance as the probability variation big hit 5 (7R probability variation ST25) and/or probability variation big hit 7 (7R probability variation ST75) is revealed in the performance without performing the promotion notification. Then, the probability variation big hit 7 (special 7R probability variation) winning may be hidden, and the probability variation big hit 7 (special 7R probability variation) winning may be notified in the ST mode after the big hit game.

In the case of performing the above-mentioned promotion notification during the ST mode (ST effect mode), it may be during the period until the ST early mode ends (until 25 ST times have ended), but the ST early mode end game (ST It is preferable to notify during the middle 25th rotation). Specifically, until the lesser of the first ST number (for example, ST25 times when the probability variation big hit is 5 wins) or the second ST number (for example, ST100 times when the probability variation big hit is 7) is reached (for example, the number of games in ST). Until the number of times reaches 25), display control is possible so as not to directly display whether it is the first hit (eg, probability variation big hit 5) or the second hit (eg probability variation big hit 7). Is. However, not limited to such notification timing, for example, the promotion notification timing may be a predetermined timing at the start of the next game when the ST early game mode is finished or in the ST middle game mode. Moreover, you may perform the 1st promotion notification in ST early stage production mode, and may perform the "step-up" promotion notification which performs 2nd promotion notification in ST middle stage production mode. In this case, the first promotion notification is a promotion notification for notifying that the ST75 mode entry or above is definite, and the second promotion notification is a promotion notification for definitely reporting the ST100 mode entry. By doing this, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension as to whether the selected jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot 5 to 7 for a long period of time during the jackpot game to the ST mode. In other words, it is possible to maintain the expectation of transition to the ST100 mode. In addition, whether to notify the promotion during the winning performance or to notify the promotion during the ST mode can be determined by a scenario lottery or the like when determining the winning performance scenario at the start of the big hit game.

(Transition to ceiling mode)
Further, in the normal mode, when the jackpot is not won up to the 989th game, the game shifts from the 990th game to the “precursor mode” (see the block frame of the predictive mode in FIG. 7). When the 1000th game is reached without reaching the jackpot even in the omen mode (ceiling reached), the mode shifts to "ceiling mode" and the ceiling function is activated. In the present embodiment, in the case of a loss, the ceiling benefit “finite time saving” is given, and after the 1001st game, the mode is shifted to the heaven mode.

<9. Regarding the specific notice production prohibition function in the precursor mode: Fig. 32>
Here, in the present embodiment, the specific notice effect prohibiting function (specific notice effect prohibiting means) operates during the precursor mode. For details, paying attention to the fact that the omen mode is the game mode related to the notification of the ceiling upcoming and the ceiling mode is the game mode related to the ceiling privilege grant, the omen mode (omen production mode) and the ceiling mode (ceiling effect) Mode), the appearance of a specific notice production is prohibited. In the case of the present embodiment, as the prohibition function, "pre-predictive notice advance prohibition means (specific prefetch advance notice prohibition means)" for prohibiting execution of prefetch advance notice is provided. In the following, the "preliminary prefetching advance notice prohibiting means" will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where the prefetching advance notice is prohibited by the precursory prefetching notice prohibiting unit. In FIG. 32, the form in which the “holding change notice” is handled as a prohibition target by the precursory prefetching notice prohibiting means is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the “holding change notice” and/or the “variation”. Medium prefetch notice".

(A. Configuration without Prohibition/Prefetching Advance Notice Prohibition Means (Normal Case): FIG. 32(A))
The “normal case” will be described with reference to FIG. The "normal case" refers to a configuration in which a precursory warning prefetching notice prohibition means is not provided, and a configuration in which a precursory warning prefetching notice prohibition means to be described later is provided (Figs. (C-1) and (C-2)). ) Is shown as a comparative example. The illustrated hold icon 770 is a “normal hold display (white hold)”, the hold icon 771 is a “high expectation hold display” of the special hold display (normal hold change notice), and the hold icon 772. Indicates "ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice)". Further, the hold icon 771 here indicates, among the special hold displays, “rainbow-colored hold (this secured reservation display)” that can appear when the big hit is won.

In addition, for the sake of convenience of explanation, FIG. 9A shows the operation holding balls related to the 1000th game (ceiling game) as the fourth operation holding balls when the three operation holding balls for the 997th to 999th games are present. This is a representative example of a case (hereinafter, referred to as “ceiling game holding ball”).

In the case of the comparative example shown in FIG. 2(a), the "preliminary prefetching advance notice prohibition means" is not provided, so whether or not there is a special hold display before the ceiling game arrives (hereinafter referred to as "normal hold change notice") Regardless, the 1000th game hold display permits the execution of the ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice). Here, "allowing" the suspended display for the ceiling means that it may be always displayed or may be displayed when a predetermined lottery is won. (The same applies to (c-1) and (c-2)). Therefore, in the case of this comparative example, even if there is a notice of the pending change of the third iridescent hold (this reserved), the fourth pending display of the ceiling game holding ball is Fujimaru's pending icon 772 It can be changed to (hold display).

However, when the big hit is won before the ceiling is reached, the ceiling function is not activated (the number of ceiling games is reset), so it can be said that there is little need to execute the ceiling hold display. In addition, if a pending change notice (special hold display) for announcing the winning expectation and a ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) for announcing that it is a ceiling game are displayed at the same time, a notice with a different character will be displayed. The display will appear at the same time, which may rather confuse the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, these problems are solved by providing a warning sign prefetching notice prohibiting means.

(B. Preliminary pre-fetching advance notice prohibition means configuration example: FIG. 32 (b), (c-1), (c-2))
Hereinafter, a configuration example in which the above-mentioned “prediction prefetching notice prohibition means” is provided will be described. There are two types of modes: "case in which normal read-ahead notice is prioritized" and "case in which ceiling read-ahead notice is prioritized" shown in Figs. (C-1) and (C-2). is there.

(Case where the normal read-ahead notice is executed with priority: Fig. 32 (b))
FIG. 32B shows “a case of executing a normal prefetching notice with priority”, specifically, “a case where the ceiling prefetching notice is prohibited when there is a reserved reservation before reaching the ceiling game (ceiling game holding ball The case of prohibiting pre-reading notice for) is shown. Here, like the case of the above-mentioned figure (a), the case where the 3rd operation reservation ball is "this reservation stay" is shown.

In the case of this example, when the reserved reservation exists before the arrival of the ceiling game, the hold display of the 1000th game (ceiling game) is not changed to the ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice), and “normal hold display” is displayed. Is revealed. In other words, the "pre-reading prohibited object hold" by the pre-predictive look-ahead notice prohibiting means is a "ceiling game holding ball".

The reason why the read-ahead prohibited object suspension is set to "ceiling game suspension ball" is as follows. If the reserved reservation exists before the ceiling game, the jackpot is won before the ceiling function is activated (before the ceiling privilege is given), and thus it is not necessary to display the ceiling reserved display. Further, when the ceiling hold display is prohibited when the reserved reservation is present, if the 1000th game reserved display remains the normal reserved display, the speculative element "there is the reserved reservation before reaching the ceiling game" There is also a dramatic merit that the player who knows this can prevent wasteful hitting until the ceiling arrives. However, instead of prohibiting the ceiling reservation display at all when there is a reservation for this reservation, if a notice of change in the reservation (rainbow-colored reservation) related to this reservation is not appearing, that is, a look-ahead for this reservation If the preliminary lottery is "missing", the ceiling hold display may be displayed (permitted). If the reservation change notice related to the reserved reservation is not displayed, the player cannot know that the reserved reservation exists before reaching the ceiling game, but even if the ceiling reserved display is displayed. Even so, if the jackpot is won before the ceiling game is reached, there is no particular disadvantage to the player. It should be noted that rather than prohibiting the appearance of the ceiling hold display when the reservation change notice (rainbow-colored hold) related to this reservation is displayed, more than the high expectation hold change notice (for example, green hold or more) It is also possible to prohibit the appearance of the ceiling-use hold display when the notice of change in hold is displayed.

(Case in which ceiling read-ahead notice is preferentially executed: Fig. 32 (C-1) (C-2))
Next, the “case in which the ceiling pre-reading notice is preferentially executed” will be described.

FIG. 32(C-1) shows an example of “a case of prioritizing the ceiling pre-reading notice”.
(Α) A configuration example in which “a part of the normal look-ahead notice is prohibited while the warning notice for the ceiling (ceiling display for the ceiling) is allowed in the sign mode”,
(Β) A configuration example in which “in the predictive mode, a normal look-ahead notice is completely prohibited, while a ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) is allowed” is shown.
In the configuration example shown in this figure (C-1), the prefetch prohibition target hold is not used as the “ceiling game hold ball” as in the above figure (B), but the prefetch prohibition target hold is “digested during the precursor game. This is a configuration example in which the ceiling game holding balls are excluded from the prohibition target.

In the above (α), “prohibiting a part of the normal prefetch notice” means, for example, of the normal hold change notice (special hold display), the appearance of the low expectation hold change notice is allowed, while the high expectation change notice is allowed. The configuration is such that the appearance of the advance notice of the change in expectation hold is prohibited. Specifically, the following configurations 1 and 2 are provided.
(Structure 1) The appearance of pending change notices below yellow hold (blue hold and yellow hold) is allowed, and notice of pending change above green is higher than that of yellow hold (green hold, red hold and iridescent). Reservation) is prohibited.
(Structure 2) A structure in which a hold change notice (a hold display other than a rainbow color hold) that indicates other than the certainty is allowed to appear, and a hold change notice hold that indicates the certainty is displayed is prohibited.

The above-mentioned "configuration 1" is for prohibiting only high-anticipation withholding change notices such as green, red, and iridescent in the case of this reservation. On the other hand, the above-mentioned “configuration 2” prohibits only “rainbow-colored hold” of the reserved reservation display from the high-expectancy-hold change notices. Therefore, in the case of the configuration 2, the occurrence of the pending change notice other than the “rainbow-color pending” indicating the certainty is permitted.

In "(β)", "Prohibit advance notice in advance" means that normal advance notice (here, pending change notice) is prohibited, and ceiling change notice (ceiling hold display) does not appear. It is a structure that allows. Therefore, in the case of the above configuration (β), no normal pre-reading notice appears in the precursor mode, and only the ceiling pending change notice (ceiling pending display) appears.

The reason for doing so as shown in Fig. (C-1) (above (α) or (β)) is as follows. If the normal reservation change notice (special hold display) is allowed to appear unnecessarily, the normal hold change notice and the ceiling hold display are displayed at the same time, and the player (especially, It causes confusion among game beginners). In particular, if the high-expectancy-hold change notice and the ceiling-use change notice are mixed, the degree of confusion of the player increases. Therefore, it is preferable to prohibit the pre-reading notice itself, or at least the high-anticipation pending change notice. In addition, in the case of prohibiting some or all of the pre-reading notices during the sign mode, the player does not know that there is or is the possibility of the existence of the reserved reservation before reaching the ceiling game. This is because even if the high-expectation-degree pending change notice indicating that is not displayed, there is no particular disadvantage to the player if the jackpot is won before the ceiling game is reached. In addition, if the pre-reading notice itself in the sign mode is completely prohibited, it also leads to a reduction in the effect control burden.

Unlike the above-described diagram (C-1), the diagram (C-2) is an example of a configuration in which a ceiling pending change notice is preferentially executed by setting a part of the period in the precursor mode as a prefetching prohibited section. As a representative example, FIG. (C-2) shows an example in which the maximum number of reserved balls before the ceiling game (section of the 996th to 999th games) is set as the prefetching prohibited section. In the case of this example, the prefetching notice is prohibited in the 996th to 999th game sections. However, instead of prohibiting the pre-reading notice at all in the relevant section, the configuration may be such that "a part of the pre-reading notice is prohibited" as shown in (α) of FIG.

32(A), (B), (C-1), and (C-2) in FIG. 32, the number of ceiling games is determined by a specific notification effect such as "countdown display (remaining ceiling number display effect)". The number of remaining games up to can be configured to be notified. Here, the countdown display itself does not give advance notice of the expected winning degree, but merely informs the remaining ceiling game, and does not perform a notice function such as a prefetch notice. However, it is also possible to use the presentation mode of the countdown display to give an advance notice of the expectation of winning, that is, to notify the possibility of existence of the secured reservation. For example, in the case of preferentially executing the ceiling pre-reading notice in Fig. (C-1) or (C-2), the operation holding balls (1-2 Each time a (count) is consumed, a special countdown display (for example, display color difference or display size difference) that is different from the normal countdown display (display mode when there is no such reservation) is displayed. It may indicate the existence of a hold. For example, if the normal countdown display uses white number images, the special countdown display may change to a color (red) other than white, or the number image may become huge. is there.

The present embodiment can include, for example, the following configurations regarding the prefetch notice.
An acquisition unit (S301 and S302 in FIG. 10, S314 in FIG. 11) that acquires predetermined game information based on the satisfaction of the start condition (when the start unit detects the game ball).
Lottery means (S410 of FIG. 12) for executing a lottery on winning based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means,
A symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) that performs a variable display operation of symbols and displays the lottery result by the lottery means in the symbol stop display mode,
The game information acquired by the acquisition means is reserved storage means (reserved storage area of the RAM 203) which is reserved and stored up to a predetermined maximum reserved storage number until the variable display operation of the game symbol on the symbol display means is performed. , S311 to S314 in FIG. 10),
Pre-reading determination means (S318 in FIG. 11) for pre-reading at least the lottery result by the lottery means before the variable display operation of the game symbol based on the storage is executed.
Pre-reading notice production control means (production control unit 24, S1008 in FIG. 19) configured to be able to control execution of pre-reading notice for notifying information related to the pre-reading determination result by the pre-reading determination means,
Pre-reading notice prohibition control means (FIG. 32) for prohibiting execution (display) of the pre-reading notice based on a predetermined prohibition condition,
Ceiling privilege control means (S420, S421, S412, FIG. 13 to FIG. 15 of FIG. 7, and the like) that grants a ceiling privilege more advantageous than the normal state (executes control of the ceiling privilege) based on a predetermined grant condition When,
The ceiling privilege is given (for example, the ceiling game is approaching, or the ceiling privilege is given within the existing number of operation-holding balls, or the pattern variation display game relating to the target operation-holding balls is Ceiling privilege advance notification control means for controlling execution of a pre-ceiling notification effect (for example, ceiling reservation change notice (ceiling hold display in FIG. 32)) that notifies in advance that the ceiling privilege will be given when executed. , And can be configured to be able to control a plurality of types of game states (game modes). The pre-reading notice prohibiting means prohibits execution of the pre-reading notice during the whole or a part of the specific game mode (FIG. 32 (b) (c-1) (c-2)). The specific game mode is, for example, a game mode before the ceiling game is reached (before the ceiling mode is shifted), and specifically, a precursor mode just before the ceiling game is reached (a game mode immediately before the ceiling mode is shifted) is applicable. In addition, the ceiling privilege control means, specifically, after a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, after the end of electric support or after a big hit game, or after transition to a game state with a low probability state, etc.) Usually, when the number of fluctuations (the number of games) of the symbols executed in the play state with a low probability state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (the number of ceiling games) without the occurrence of (or without winning the jackpot) It works as a functional unit that controls the ceiling privilege (privilege game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state.

(Game mode related to latent condition)
In the case of providing the latent probability state, for example, as shown in FIG. 28, different data values may be set between the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) corresponding to another game state and the game state determination number YJ. A “latent probability mode” may be provided as a game mode corresponding to the latent probability state, and a “latent probability effect mode” may be provided as an effect mode related to the latent probability mode. Further, although the ST mode according to the present embodiment has been described as being the game mode corresponding to the “probability variation state”, all or part of the ST mode can be treated as the game mode corresponding to the “latent probability state”. The fluctuation state under the latent probability mode (latent probability state) is explained in the above "In case of applying infinite latent probability or limited latent probability" in "(7-5-1. Fluctuation state related to heaven mode)". Similarly to the above, it is preferable that the fluctuation state is the same as or substantially the same as that in the normal mode, or at least the fluctuation state is slower than the short-time mode (the fluctuation state in which the average digestion time is relatively long).

<Processing on main controller side: FIGS. 8 to 18>
Next, with reference to FIG. 8 to FIG. 18, game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described. The main control unit 20 side includes an infinite loop main process (main control side main process: FIG. 8) and a timer interrupt process (main control side timer interrupt process: FIG. 8) activated by a timed interrupt from the CTC. 9) and are mainly constituted.

<12. Main control side main processing: Fig. 8>
The main processing on the main control unit 20 side (main control side main processing) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing details of main processing on the main control side. The main control side main processing starts with the watchdog timer (WDT) function being activated when a system reset occurs at the time of recovery from a power failure or power failure, or because the control program has run out of control. Is forcibly reset (WDT reset). In either case, when the main processing on the main control side is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first executes the initial setting processing necessary for starting the game operation as part of the power-on processing (step S011). ).

When the initial setting process of step S011 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the setting change mode transition state in which the set value can be changed is entered (step S014). In the case of the present embodiment, the setting key switch 94 (operated to the setting change mode side) and the RAM clear switch 98 in the state where the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and the door is opened (the door opening sensor 61 is ON (opening detection)). When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on while the ON operation is being performed (both the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear signal are ON), the current set value is displayed on the setting display 97, and the setting change operation is being performed. The setting is controlled to a setting change allowable state (setting change mode transition state) in which the setting value can be changed.

When it is in the setting change mode transition state (step S014: YES), the setting change process for managing the change operation of the set value (1 to 6 steps) is executed (step S023). In the setting change process, first, the setting value storage area of the RAM 203 is cleared and the ON/OFF operation of the setting change switch 95 related to the setting change operation is monitored. To change the set value, a person in charge of the hall or the like can change the set value to any one of the settings 1 to 6 by operating the setting change switch 95, and the setting change completion switch 96 is turned off. The set value is confirmed by. When the CPU 201 confirms that the setting value has been confirmed, it stores the setting value data in the setting value storage area of the RAM 203, and exits the setting change process. Then, the processing state is shifted to the in-area RAM clear processing (step S031) described later. The RAM clear switch 98 can function as a setting change switch without providing the setting change switch 95 (the RAM clear switch 98 also functions as the setting change switch 95). Further, the setting key switch 94 can be made to function as a setting change completion switch without providing the setting change completion switch 96 (the configuration key switch 94 also functions as the setting change completion switch 96). In this case, the setting change operation can be ended by turning off the setting key switch 94.

On the other hand, if it is not in the setting change mode transition state (step S014: NO), the contents of the RAM are checked to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (step S015). Here, it is determined whether the set value stored in the set value storage area is a normal value (whether a value indicating any one of the settings 1 to 6 is stored) and whether the checksum value at the time of backup is Check if the value is normal. If the contents of the RAM are abnormal (step S015: YES), a power-on waiting process (step S020) described later relating to the RAM error is executed.

If there is no abnormality in the contents of the RAM, that is, if it is normal (step S015: NO), then it is determined whether the backup flag BF is in the ON state (5AH) (step S016). In this backup flag BF, "5AH (normal value)" is the BF flag storage area in the area RAM when the backup processing is normally executed in the power supply abnormality check processing (step S081 in FIG. 9) described later. Is set to. Therefore, in the normal time, the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, there is a case where the backup flag BF is not a normal value (≠5AH) due to some trouble. Therefore, when the backup flag BF is not in the ON state (step S016: NO), power re-waiting processing is executed (step S020).

In this power-on waiting process, as a process at the time of a RAM error, a control process for forcibly stopping the progress of the game process is executed. This power-on waiting process is a process that is executed even when the RAM is abnormal in step S015 (step S15: YES). When this power-restart waiting process is executed, the power of the gaming machine 1 is restarted, the setting change transition mode state is set at the time of the restart, and the setting change process (step S023) is not executed unless The RAM error condition cannot be resolved. In the present embodiment, the setting change process (step S023) and an in-area RAM clear process (step S031) described below are executed to execute the entire area of the RAM 203 (however, a RAM area related to performance display (outside area RAM). Area) is excluded) and the RAM error is resolved.

When the backup flag BF is in the ON state (step S016: YES), it is determined whether or not it is in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025). In the RAM clear mode transition state, when the RAM clear operation is performed, specifically, the setting key switch 94 is turned OFF (the setting change mode side is not operated) when the power to the gaming machine 1 is off, When the RAM clear switch 98 is turned ON (setting key switch signal OFF, RAM clear signal ON), the power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, and the process is shifted.

If it is in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025: YES), the area RAM clear process is executed (step S031). In the in-area RAM clearing process, at least the storage area of the RAM 203 excluding the RAM area related to the performance display and the set value storage area is cleared. Therefore, the value of the backup flag BF and the checksum value set when the power is cut off are both cleared to zero in this processing. Further, here, various commands necessary for clearing the RAM (for example, “RAM clear command” indicating that the RAM has been cleared, “waiting customer command”, etc.) are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command, the initialization notification effect for notifying the RAM clear is executed, and the effect mode in the initial state is set to the "normal effect mode". Specifically, the game mode is set to the normal mode of the initial mode, and the effect mode is also set to the normal effect mode corresponding to the normal mode (any one of the normal A to normal C effect modes (for example, normal mode)). ..

When the in-area RAM clearing process in step S031 is completed, next, an initial setting process for RAM clearing (power-on initial data setting process) is executed (step S032). In the power-on initial data setting process, for example, the RAM for clear signal (one of the security signal) transmission timer is set to 30,000 ms, special symbols to be displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a, 38b (special symbol 1 stop symbol, As the special figure 2 stop pattern) data, the lost pattern data is set. Then, the CTC setting process (step S036) described later is executed.

Returning to the description of step S025, when the RAM clear mode transition state is not set (step S025: NO), it is then determined whether the setting confirmation mode transition state is set (step S026). In this setting confirmation mode transition state, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, specifically, the state in which the setting key switch 94 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned off when the power to the gaming machine 1 is off. (When the setting key switch signal is ON and the RAM clear signal is OFF), the power is turned on. The "setting confirmation operation" is, for example, an operation performed by a person in charge of the hall or the like when confirming the current setting value.

If it is in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026: YES), the setting confirmation processing (step S027) for controlling the current setting value to the confirmable setting confirmation state is executed. Then, a backup restoration process (step S028) for restoring the game process from the backup data backed up at the time of power interruption is executed. In the setting confirmation processing, display processing for displaying the current setting value (setting confirmation display) on the setting display 97 is performed. The display of the set value is ended by turning off the setting key switch. After the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the backup restoration process is performed, and the CTC setting process (step S036) described later is executed.

When it is not in the setting confirmation mode shift state (step S026: NO), that is, when the power is simply turned on to the gaming machine 1, the above-mentioned backup restoration processing (step S028) is performed, and the gaming processing at the time of backup is performed based on the backup data. Restore.

After performing any of the above-mentioned setting change processing (step S023), area RAM clear processing (step S031), setting confirmation processing (step S027), and backup restoration processing (step S028), CTC setting is performed. The process is executed (step S036). Here, a CTC setting process for periodically generating a timer interrupt is executed every 4 ms. Thereby, thereafter, the interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output, and the main control side timer interrupt process (4 ms interrupt process) shown in FIG. 9 is executed.

Then, assuming that the game startable state is ready, the emission control signal (emission permission signal ES) for permitting the emission operation of the emission device 32 is set from the OFF state (emission inhibition state) to the ON state (emission permission state), and the game is executed. A start command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. As a result, the game ball launching operation from the launching device 32 is permitted. Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the game start command, it performs an initial operation (initializing operation) on the movable body accessory. However, during the initialization operation, the image display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emission mode of the decoration lamp 45, and the sound output from the speaker 46 do not change. The initialization operation here is exclusively an operation check at the time of turning on the power of the movable body accessory.

When the series of power-on processing is completed, the infinite loop processing of steps S040 to S045 related to the normal game progress is executed. As a result, the game is controlled so that the game can be started. When entering the loop processing, first, in the state where the CPU is set to the interrupt disabled state (step S040), various random number updating processing is executed (step S041). In this various random number updating process, various software random numbers used in the special symbol variable display game and the normal symbol variable display game (random numbers circulating in a predetermined numerical range by the increment process) are updated. For example, the random number for special symbol determination used in the symbol lottery, the random number related to the lottery per auxiliary (the random number for auxiliary hit determination used in the winning lottery per auxiliary, the ordinary symbol judgment used in the symbol lottery per auxiliary Random number) initial value (start value) used to change the random number (special symbol judgment initial value random number, auxiliary hit judgment initial value random number, etc.), fluctuation pattern random number used for fluctuation pattern selection, etc. Update.

When the above various random number update processing (step S041) is completed, then performance display monitor total division processing of the out-of-area program is executed (step S043). In this performance display monitor total division processing, processing necessary for calculating the base value displayed on the performance display 99 is executed.

When the performance display monitor total division process of step S043 is finished, the interrupt enable state is set (step S045), the process returns to step S040, and then the processes of steps S040 to S045 are repeatedly executed (main loop process). .. The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processing and performance display monitor tabulation/division processing except during the timer interrupt processing that is intermittently executed.

<13. Main control side timer interrupt process: Figure 9>
Next, the timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main control side timer interrupt process. The main control side timer interrupt process is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is interrupted and executed during execution of the main control side main process.

In FIG. 9, when the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes the power supply abnormality check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check processing, the power supply level supplied from a power supply board (not shown) is monitored, and if a power supply abnormality such as power failure occurs, the backup flag BF is set (BF←5AH) and the checksum value is set. A checksum calculation (here, 8-bit addition calculation processing targeting the RAM in the area) and a backup processing including storage of the calculation result are performed. The power supply abnormality check process works as a backup unit that holds data in a predetermined area of the RAM even after the power supply is cut off.

Next, the timer management process is executed (step S082). The timer values of various timers (time) used for controlling the game operation of the gaming machine 1 are updated here.

Next, the input management process is executed (step S083). In the input management processing, various counters (for example, a winning counter for winning ball count provided for each winning opening) are updated based on detection information of various sensors and switches provided in the gaming machine 1. Further, here, the input data is created based on the input information of the status signal from the payout control board 29. If the status signal indicates an abnormality, a predetermined error process is performed in an error management process (step S089) described later.

Next, a setting abnormality check process is executed (step S084). In the setting abnormality check processing, it is determined whether the set value data is a normal value (value indicating the settings 1 to 6), and if the value is not within the normal range, it is determined that an error has occurred in the set value data and a setting error Set the flag to the ON state (5AH). Then, a setting value abnormality command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the setting abnormality check processing is exited. When the production control unit 24 receives the setting value abnormality command, the production means is used to execute the setting abnormality error notification (RAM error notification). When the setting error flag is in the ON state when the setting abnormality check process is executed again, the process directly ends without doing anything.

Next, a random number management process within a timer interrupt is executed (step S085). In the random number management process within the timer interrupt, the random number related to each variable display game is updated periodically. Specifically, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, for the special symbol determination random number and the auxiliary hit determination random number, the random number is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt), and the random number counter makes one round. Each time, the start value of the random number counter is changed. The internal lottery random number (random number for jackpot determination) is generated by the random number generation circuit and is not updated here.

Then, an error management process is executed (step S089). In this error management processing, whether or not an error (abnormality) has occurred in the game operation is monitored based on the detection information related to various switches and sensors, the status signal from the payout control board 29, etc., and the error has occurred. In that case, an error command that can specify the error type is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and error processing according to the error type is executed. When the error is released, an error release command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the error release process is executed.

Next, prize ball management processing is executed (step S090). In the prize ball management processing, the prize counter is checked, and if there is a prize, a payout control command for designating the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the gaming ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the command, and executes the payout operation of the designated prize ball number.

Then, a normal symbol management process is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management processing, necessary processing is executed for the normal symbol variable display game (variable display operation of normal symbols). Here, it is monitored whether or not the game ball is detected by the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, and when the game ball is detected, the predetermined game information necessary for the auxiliary hit lottery (random number for auxiliary hit determination etc.) Obtained (universal figure random number acquisition processing), the game information is stored as pending data (universal figure operation reserved sphere) up to the maximum number of reserved memories (here, four) (universal figure reserved storage processing). Then, when the predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, an auxiliary winning lottery based on the universal figure operation holding ball is performed, and a variation pattern of a normal symbol based on the auxiliary winning lottery result is selected and a normal symbol stop display mode (normal stop) Design). In addition, here, in order to normally operate the variable display, the LED display data for the variable display is created if it is changing, and the LED display data for the stop display is created if it is not changing (normal Symbol display data update process).

Then, a normal electric accessory management process is executed (step S092). In this normal electric auditors product management process, the process required to execute the normal electric opening game is executed. Here, when the lottery result of the auxiliary win lottery is a win, the setting process of the solenoid control data for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c is executed. The solenoid control data set here is converted into an excitation signal in a solenoid management process in step S100 described later, and the excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c. As a result, the opening/closing operation pattern of the opening/closing lid 47 is controlled.

Next, a special symbol management process is executed (step S093). In this special symbol management process, a process relating to a special symbol variable display game is executed. In this special symbol management process (big hit determination means), a big hit lottery is mainly performed in the special symbol variable display game, and a variation pattern (prefetch variation pattern, variation pattern at the start of variation) of the special symbol based on the lottery result or Determine special stop design. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the special electric auditors product management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric auditors product management process, mainly based on the big hit lottery result, it is necessary for the hit game, such as execution control of the hit game according to the hit Performs various processing. The special electric auditors product management process works as special game control means for executing and controlling the winning game according to the winning type. Details of the special electric auditors product management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, right-handed notification information management processing is executed (step S097). In this right-handed notification information management process, in order to turn on the right-handed display device 39b when the gaming state is "right-handed advantageous" (during a winning game, a state with electric support (time saving state or probability changing state)) LED data is created, and when the gaming state is "left-handed advantage" (normal state), LED data for turning off the right-handed display device 39b is created.

Next, the LED management process is executed (step S098). In this LED management processing, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) to various LED display devices such as the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the right hit display device 39b is executed. The control signal based on the LED display data created by the normal symbol management process (step S091), the special symbol management process (step S093), the right-handed notification information management process (step S097), etc. is output by this LED management process. To be done.

Then, an external terminal management process is executed (step S099). In this external terminal management processing, various external end signals are created through the frame external terminal board 21, and output control is executed for an external device such as the hall computer HC.

Next, the solenoid management process is executed (step S100). In this solenoid management processing, based on the solenoid control data set in the normal electric auditors product management processing (step S092) and the special electric auditors product management processing (step S094), the normal electric auditors product solenoid 41c and the special winning opening solenoid 52c are selected. On the other hand, the output control of the excitation signal is executed. As a result, the movable wing piece 47 and the open door 52b are drive-controlled, and the lower start opening 35 and the special winning opening 50 are opened and closed.

Next, all registers are saved (step S101), performance display monitor processing belonging to the out-of-region program is executed (step S102), and then all registers are restored (S103). In the performance display monitor processing, necessary processing relating to calculation of the base value displayed on the performance display 99 and display control is executed.

Then, the count value of WDT is cleared (step S104). As a result, the WDT is reset for each interrupt, and the count value is returned to the initial value.

When the processes of steps S081 to S104 are finished, the timer interrupt process is finished and the main process on the main control side is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<19. Special symbol management process: Figure 10>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S093) in FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol management process.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first performs the "special figure 1 starting opening check process" for the special design 1 side (upper starting opening 34 side) (step S301), and subsequently, the special design 2 side (lower starting opening 35 side). The "special figure 2 starting opening check process" regarding the above is executed (step S302). Details of the special figure 1 starting port check process and the special figure 2 starting port check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the starting opening check process of steps S301 to S302 is finished, the state of the small hitting flag is determined (step S303). The "small hitting flag" is a flag for designating whether or not the small hitting game is being performed. When the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it means that the small hitting game is being performed. When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not in progress. In addition, although the small hit is not provided in the present embodiment, in the following description, it is assumed that the hit type includes “small hit”.

When the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S303: ≠5AH), the state of the conditional device operation flag is then determined (step S304). This "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it means that a big hit game is in progress. When is OFF (00H), it means that the big hit game is not in progress.

During the small hit game (step S303:=5AH), or during the big hit game (step S304:=5AH), the processing relating to the variable display operation of the special symbols in steps S306 to S308 is not performed, and step S309 is directly performed. Go to the special symbol display data update process. Therefore, in either the small hit game or the big hit game, the variable display operation of the special symbol is not performed. That is, during the winning game, the stop display mode of the special symbol is retained while being fixedly displayed as the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol.

On the other hand, in step S304, when the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S304: ≠5AH), that is, when neither the small hit game nor the big hit game is in progress (step S303: ≠5AH, and step S304: ≠5AH), processing according to the special symbol operation status (00H to 03H) is performed. The "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and this status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

In the special symbol operation status branch process of step S305, depending on which of the status values the special symbol operation status is “standby (00H, 01H)”, “changing (02H)”, “confirming (03H)” Then, any one of steps S306 to S308 is executed. Specifically, if the special symbol operation status is "standby (00H, 01H)", the special symbol variation start processing (step S306), if "variing (02H)", special In the process of changing symbols (step S307), in the case of "confirming (03H)", the process during special symbol confirmation time (step S308) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned "standby" means that the behavior of the special symbol is a standby state for the next change, and "being changed" means that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). The above-mentioned “during confirmation” indicates that the change of the special symbol ends and the stop (confirmation) is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, the variable display operation of the special symbol (display operation of setting one variation start and one variation stop) will be realized. The details of the special symbol variation start process (step S306) and the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308), which are deeply related to the present invention, will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 and 16A to 16B.

When the processing of any of the above steps S306 to S308 is completed, the special symbol display data update processing of step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating, and if it is fluctuating, the data of the special symbol that repeats blinking at predetermined time intervals (data for changing 7-segment blinking display) ) Is created, and if the special symbol is not changing, data for stop display (data for 7-segment blinking display during stop display) is created. The display data of the special symbol created here is output by the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. 9, and the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. When the special symbol display data updating process ends, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special electric auditors product management process of step S095 of FIG. 9 is executed.

<11. Toku-zu 1 Start gate check process: Fig. 11>
The special figure 1 starting opening check process (step S301 in FIG. 10) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 1 starting opening check process. This special figure 1 starting mouth check processing plays a role as a winning time processing that is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and is mainly processing related to pending storage when a game ball wins the upper starting mouth 34. Alternatively, it is mainly composed of processing related to prefetch determination. It should be noted that the special figure 1 starting port check process and the special figure 2 starting port check process are different only in whether the processing contents are related to the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side. The processing contents are substantially the same. Therefore, in order to avoid redundant description, the special figure 1 starting opening check process will be mainly described.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the upper starting opening 34 (step S311).

When the winning of the upper starting opening 34 (starting opening on the special figure 1 side) is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 operation reserve ball number is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether the number of special figure 1 operation holding balls is less than the maximum holding storage number (here, four). In addition, when the winning detection of the upper starting port 34 is not detected (step S311: NO), the special figure 1 starting port check process is exited without doing anything.

Special figure 1 When the number of operation reserve balls is 4 or more, that is, when an over-winning prize exceeding the maximum reserved memory number occurs (step S312: YES), an over-winning command for specifying an over-winning prize (in the case of special drawing 1, B006H, and B106H in the case of Toku-zu 2) are transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S324). On the other hand, when the special figure 1 operation holding sphere number is not 4 or more, that is, when it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added to the special figure 1 operation holding sphere number (+1) (step S313), and step S314. Go to processing.

When the processing proceeds to step S314, various random numbers used in the special symbol variable display game 1 relating to the special figure 1 operation holding sphere that has occurred this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random value is stored in the reserved storage area of the internal RAM. This hold storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information relating to the variable display game as an operation hold ball (hold data), and in this hold storage area, the various random number values described above as hold data are special symbols. Until the variable display operation 1 is performed (until the execution of the special symbol variable display game 1), the starting conditions are held and stored in order (winning order). The reserved storage area includes a reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (special figure 1 reserved storage area (first reserved storage area) corresponding to the special symbol 1) and a special symbol. 2 corresponding to No. 2 reserved storage area (second reserved storage area) is provided, and each of them can store the reserved data for the maximum number of operating reserved balls.

Next, the prefetching prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") for prohibiting the prefetching determination is acquired from the command data (prize command 1) corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the "hold addition command" (step S315), Then, it is determined whether or not the "prefetching prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S316). The "prefetching prohibition condition" is a condition that prohibits the prefetching judgment (preemption notice is prohibited) for the special diagram 1 operation holding ball side when the special diagram 1 starting opening check process is being performed (special diagram 1 prefetching prohibition condition). ), and when the special map 2 starting opening check process is in progress (not shown), the condition for prohibiting the pre-reading determination (prohibiting the pre-reading notice) for the special-character 2 operation-holding ball side (special map 2 pre-reading prohibition condition) ). In the present embodiment, if the "Special game 1 operation reserve ball" can be generated with a higher probability than the special game 1 operation reserve ball, it is "a game state involving a state with electric support (time saving state or probability changing state)". Pre-reading prohibited', and conversely, the special state 1 operation-holding ball can occur with a higher probability than the special figure 2 operation-holding ball, that is, "the game state with no electric support (normal state or latent state)". For example, “Special map 2 prefetching prohibited”. Therefore, in the determination process of step S316, when the current game state is the time saving state or the probability variation state, it is determined that the special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition is satisfied, and the determination result is ‘YES’. Further, as the prefetching prohibition condition, it is possible to prohibit prefetching in the case of a specific game mode (for example, in the precursor mode).

Here, in the present embodiment, since the current game mode can be specified by the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) type (see the Tcode column in FIG. 28 ), when determining the game mode, the variation pattern selection mode ( The value of (Tcode) may be determined, but an identifier (for example, a game mode determination number YM) capable of identifying each game mode itself is provided separately from the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), whereby the current The game mode may be determined. For example, when the "general mode A" and the "general mode B" are provided in the game mode belonging to the general mode, these have the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), but as a different game mode as the game mode. This is the case to manage. In any case, when performing some processing based on the current game state (internal game state or game mode) (when performing a game process that requires information about the game state), the current internal game state, the current fluctuation pattern Using one or a plurality of identifiers that can identify the selection mode or the current game mode (game state determination number YJ, variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode, the above-mentioned game mode determination number YM, etc.), the game operation is performed. A processable structure may be used. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the game mode can be specified by the value of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode).

When the above-mentioned special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is materialized (step S316: YES), the processing (step S317-S321) regarding pre-reading decision is skipped, it advances to the processing of step S322 which it mentions later. In this case, the pre-reading determination for the special figure 1 operation holding sphere this time is not executed, and the hold addition command having the pre-reading prohibition data (EVENT: “9FH”) is created (see step S322 described later). ). As a result, the execution of the pre-reading notice of the current operation holding ball is controlled to be in a prohibited state (the pre-reading notice for the current operation holding ball is not executed).

When the special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), it is then determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S317). When the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S317:=5AH), that is, when the RAM error (setting error) occurs, the process related to the prefetch determination (steps S317 to S321) is skipped, and step S322 described later is performed. Go to processing. In this case as well, the prefetching determination for the current operation reserved ball is not executed, the pending addition command having the prefetching prohibition data (EVENT: “9FH”) is created, and the prefetching notice is not executed. In other words, the pre-reading prohibition data (9FH) can be said to be data that specifies that the pre-reading determination processing (steps S318 to S321) has not been executed.

When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S317:≠5AH), the random number determination process is executed (step S318). This random number determination process is performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination' process, and here, the “random lottery at the start of variation (described later) is performed when the current operation holding ball is subjected to the variation display operation. "Step S410 of FIG. 12)" is performed in advance to perform "prefetch failure determination".

In the random number determination process, first, a "hit random number determination table (not shown)" is obtained, and a big hit determination random number value is obtained. Then, based on the obtained jackpot determination random number value and the hit random number determination table, the winning lottery (prefetch win determination) for the current operation holding ball is executed, and the lottery result (prefetch win result) is acquired.

The hit random number determination table corresponds to each of the special figure 1 operation holding ball (special symbol variation display game 1) and the special figure 2 operation holding ball (special symbol variation display game 2) A random number judgment table for hitting and a random number judgment table for hitting special figure 2) are provided. During the Toku-zu 1 starting port check process, the "Toku-zu 1 hit random number determination table" is referred to, and during the Toku-zu 2 starting port check process, the "Toku-zu 2 hit random number decision table" is referred to. The hit random number determination table is also used when a winning lottery is performed in a "random number determination process for determining a special electric auditors product operation (step S410 in FIG. 12)" described later.

In these hit random number judgment tables, a judgment area (judgment value) for determining the type of winning (big hit, small hit, lost) according to big hit lottery probability states (high probability and low probability), The jackpot determination random number value (the size of the jackpot determination random number: 65536) is determined in association with each other. Specifically, depending on which determination value the jackpot determination random number value belongs to, the winning type is determined. It has been decided.

In the case of the present embodiment, the hit random number determination table is provided with a hit determination table corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6) (a table in which at least a big winning lottery probability differs depending on the settings 1 to 6). Has been. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at the time of high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at the time of low probability (probability increase ratio: high probability/low probability) is the same in each set value, and the ratio is 10. It is set to a value that does not exceed. For example, setting 6 “1/189 at low probability, 1/63 at high probability”, setting 5 “1/198 at low probability, 1/66 at high probability”,... 231, high probability 1/77", and setting 1 "low probability 1/240, high probability 1/80" are set to win the jackpot. The probability increase rate may be different for each set value.

When the random number determination process of step S318 described above is finished, then a special stop symbol data creation process is executed (step S319). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as part of the'look-ahead determination' process, and here, when the operation pending ball this time is subjected to the variable display operation, "the symbol at the start of fluctuation "Look-ahead symbol determination" is performed in advance to determine "lottery (step S411 in FIG. 12 described later)".

In the special stop symbol data creation process, the "prefix table (not shown) corresponding to the look-ahead winning result obtained in step S318 and the special symbol type (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) to be processed this time" )” is selected. Then, the special symbol determination random number value obtained in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the acquired special symbol determination random number value, a symbol lottery (prefetching) targeting the current operation reserved ball Symbol determination) is executed, and the lottery result (prefetch symbol result) is acquired.

The "symbol table" includes a big hit type, a small hit type, a "big hit symbol table", a "small hit symbol table", and a "miss symbol pattern table" for determining the lose type, and each symbol table is a special symbol. It is provided according to the type. These symbol tables are also used when performing the symbol lottery at the start of variation in the special stop symbol creating process (step S411 of FIG. 12) described later.

In the symbol table, the determination area (determination value) for determining the winning type (symbol type) and the random number value for special symbol determination (for example, the size of the random number for special symbol determination: 200) are determined in association with each other. That is, specifically, depending on which judgment value the random number for special symbol judgment belongs to, the winning type is determined according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate. Further, as the data showing the lottery result, the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number are acquired. In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit, one of the big hits is determined according to the symbol lottery rate of FIG. Further, although not shown, the types of loss on the special map 1 side are provided with a loss A and a loss B, and the symbol lottery rates thereof are 95% for the loss A and 5% for the loss B. .. When the lose B is selected, the reach other than the N reach (for example, the reach of SP reach or higher) is selected with high probability (see FIG. 26). In addition, the loss type on the special figure 2 side is one type of the loss A. Note that the type of loss is not particularly limited, and one or more types can be provided.

The "special symbol determination data" is data for identifying a winning type (a winning type: a big hit type, a small hit type, and a lose type), and specifically, the hit type shown in FIG. 4 and a lose type not shown. This is data for identifying which (one or a plurality of types) is won. This special symbol determination data is a process that requires winning type information (for example, a game state transition preparation process of step S412 of FIG. 12 described later, a special symbol variation pattern creation process of step S413, a process related to execution control of a big hit game) (Special electric accessory management process of Figure 17) It is the data which is utilized in etc. Moreover, the above-mentioned "special stop symbol number" is data which designates the special stop symbol mode which is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. ,, is used when specifying the stop symbol type of the special symbol on the side of the main control unit 20. As for the special symbol, like the special symbol, the normal symbol determination data and the normal stop symbol number are provided.

Although a common symbol table may be set for all settings, a symbol table according to the setting may be set. For example, it can be configured as shown in (A) and (B) below.
(A) In some or all of the set values, the symbol selection rates of one or more winning types are different. For example, the symbol lottery rate of probability variation big hit 1 can be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the probability becomes.
(B) In all or a part of each set value, the probability variation rush rate (at least the total symbol lottery rate of the jackpot (probability variation jackpot and/or latent probability jackpot) with a high probability state) is different. For example, the probability variation inrush rate on the special map 1 side is 50% (see the symbol random selection probabilities of probability variation big hits 1 to 3 in FIG. 4). Can be set such that the probability variation rush rate is 50%, and the higher the set value, the higher the probability becomes. The same applies to the time saving plunge rate (the total symbol selection rate per hour saving).
In any case, it may be determined that the payout performance (machine ratio) becomes more advantageous to the player as the setting becomes higher.

When the special stop symbol data creation process of step S319 described above is finished, then the starting mouth winning number random number determination process is executed (step S320). This start-up winning award random number determination process is also performed as part of the'prefetch determination' process, and here, the “variation at the start of variation” that is executed when the current operation hold ball is subjected to the variation display operation is performed. A "prefetch variation pattern determination" is performed in advance to determine "pattern lottery (step S413 in FIG. 12 described later)".

More specifically, the result of the look-ahead symbol determination obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) (at least the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process (step S318)) and the variation pattern acquired in step S314 By using a random number (the size of the random number: 10000), the “variation pattern at the start of variation” related to the current operation holding ball is pre-read and determined. Specifically, the result of "special symbol variation pattern creation processing (step S413)" shown in FIG. Since this pre-reading determination is to pre-determine the variation pattern at the start of the variation, a “pre-reading determination table (not shown) that has the same basic configuration as a variation pattern distribution table shown in FIGS. )”. In the case of the present embodiment, the variation pattern distribution table shown in FIGS. 24 to 27 is provided as a table for both pre-reading determination and variation start.

For example, description will be made using the “winning variation pattern distribution table” in FIG. In the figure, the "probability" notation means a probabilistic big jackpot, the "hour" notation means a short and big jackpot, and the "probability 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7" notation probable jackpot 1-7, "hour" "1, 2" means 1, 2 per hour. With reference to FIG. 24, for example, the look-ahead symbol result this time is “probable variation big hit 1 (probability 1)”, the variation pattern selection mode Tcode (current game state) is “00H (general mode)”, and variation If the random number for the pattern is a value that belongs to the judgment value (judgment area 0 to 49) of “per normal fluctuation direct hit”, the illustrated EVENT1 “21H” (refer to the column of EVENT1 of “per normal fluctuation direct hit”) To be acquired. The Arabic numeral shown in FIG. 24 indicates a judgment value (size of the judgment area) (similar to FIGS. 25 to 27). For example, when the random number for the fluctuation pattern belongs to the judgment values 0 to 49, “normal fluctuation direct hit” is performed. When "win" is selected (selection rate: 50/10000) and belongs to the judgment values of 50 to 129, "normal medium N reach B" is selected (selection rate: 80/10000) and belongs to the judgment values of 130 to 209 "Normal SP reach A" is selected (selection rate: 80/10000).

This EVENT1 is data (winning command data 1) used for creating a hold addition command, and is data of the second byte (lower byte) of the hold addition command. As a result, the prefetching prohibition data “9FH” acquired in step S315 of the preprocessing is updated to a data value (excluding the reserved ball count information) that specifies the content of the prefetching variation pattern in this processing, and the prefetching variation pattern The type is specified. In this pre-reading variation pattern determination, the number of operation-holding balls at the pre-reading determination is not considered. The reason is as follows. At the stage of determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the number of operation-holding balls (see the column of the number of operation-holding balls in FIGS. 24 to 27). However, at the time of pre-reading determination, the number of operation-holding balls at the time of pre-reading determination does not necessarily match the number of operation-holding balls at the start of variation, and thus it is not possible to accurately determine the variation pattern (detailed pattern) at the start of variation. Therefore, in the look-ahead variation pattern determination, the variation pattern type (basic pattern) that is the skeleton of the variation pattern at the start of variation is determined without considering the number of operation-holding balls at the time of the pre-read determination. For example, referring to the columns of the normal fluctuation 4s to the normal fluctuation 12s and the normal medium N reach A in the "missing fluctuation pattern distribution table" shown in FIG. Different data is acquired to identify the N reach A that is variable or normal (refer to the column of COM2 (variation pattern designation command data)), but it does not depend on the number of operation pending balls at the time of pre-reading determination. The data (EVEN1 “01H”) common to the normal fluctuation 4s to the normal fluctuation 12s and the normal medium N reach A is acquired.

When the series of pre-reading determination processing in the above steps S318 to S321 is completed, subsequently, the winning command data 2 (MODE) on the upper byte side is acquired based on the current number of operation reserve balls and the special symbol type (special figure 1 The value of "B6H-B9H" is obtained according to 1 to 4 operation-reserving balls, and "BBH-BEH" is obtained according to 1 to 4 special reserve balls 1). A "hold addition command" is created based on the command data 2 (MODE) and the overwriting prize command data 1 (prefetch variation pattern designation information) on the lower byte (EVENT) side (step S322) and stored in the RAM 203. Without doing so (since the data relating to the hold addition command is unnecessary thereafter), it is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S323). In addition, when pre-reading is prohibited or when an abnormality occurs in the set value data, pre-reading prohibition data “9FH” is maintained as it is. Therefore, a holding addition command having “pre-reading prohibition data” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. (See the processing route of steps S315→S322 or S316→S322).

When the holding addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 that receives the holding addition command, if the information included in the holding addition command is "other than the pre-reading prohibition designation", whether or not the pre-reading notice can be executed. The lottery (pre-reading notice lottery) is performed, and when this is won, a pre-reading notice production scenario is created, and based on the scenario, the pre-reading notice for the current operation reserved ball is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of “pre-reading prohibition designation”, the pre-reading preliminary announcement lottery is not executed or the pre-reading preliminary announcement lottery is forcibly processed as a loss, and the pre-reading preliminary announcement is prohibited. In this embodiment, the pre-reading prohibition addition or the setting abnormality error is configured to transmit the pre-reading prohibition-designated pending addition command, for the following reason. ..

In the case of this embodiment, even if a setting error occurs, the game operation is not forcibly stopped. The first reason is that the elimination of the setting error is eliminated by performing the setting change operation as described above, but the setting change operation during business is a matter of excitement from the viewpoint of legal request. There is a high possibility that it will fall under the prohibited items. Secondly, if the game operation process is immediately forcibly stopped when a setting error occurs, the player feels distrust of the sudden game stop. For example, if the design variation display game in progress is executed during normal operation, or if you are playing a big jackpot, you accidentally encounter a setting error and control it so that you cannot immediately play. If this happens, the profit that the player should originally have lost will be lost, leading to the player's distrust. In consideration of such circumstances, if a setting error occurs, the error notification is stopped and the game progress itself is conditional, but the game progresses as it is. The expression "with a condition" is used here to prohibit the prefetching notice or to forcefully lose the result of the symbol variation display game when a setting error occurs (see FIG. 11). Step S317 (=5 AH), step S409 (=5 AH) of FIG. 12 described later). In this way, the reason for advancing the game as it is with "condition" is to stop the error notification when a setting error occurs, and if there is no other countermeasure, it is caused by the defect and the production control process or This is because the jackpot lottery may not be executed correctly.

Then, the set value command is transmitted (step S324). This “setting value command” includes information that can specify the current setting value, and is used by the effect control unit 24 side when the announcement effect and the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value are displayed. .. The set value command is transmitted every time the operation holding ball is generated in the starting opening check process. As a result, the effect control unit 24 side can perform the appearance control of the notice effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect using the pre-reading notice) related to the operation-holding ball, based on the correct setting value information. As described above, the special figure 1 starting port check process is exited, and subsequently, the special figure 2 starting port check process (step S302) is executed.

<21. Special symbol fluctuation start processing: Figure 12>
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) in FIG. 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process.

In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 operation holding ball number is zero (step S401), and when the special figure 2 operation holding ball number is not zero (step S401: NO), FIG. 2 executes the process (steps S403 to S416) at the start of fluctuation for the number of reserve balls. On the other hand, if the number of special figure 2 operation holding balls is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether the number of special figure 1 operation holding balls is zero (step S402), and the special figure 1 operation holding ball is determined. When the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the process at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) for the special figure 1 operation-reserving ball number is executed. Through the processing of steps S401 and S402, "priority" of which of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially provided for the variable display operation (which operation holding ball is exhausted) The order of change" is determined. In the present embodiment, when the operation holding balls are present in both the special figure 1 operation holding balls and the special figure 2 operation holding balls, the special figure 2 operation holding balls are preferentially digested.

In addition, when both of the special reserve 2 operation reserve balls and the special reserve 1 operation reserve balls are zero (step S401: YES, and step S402: YES), the state of "no reserve ball" Becomes The state of "no operation holding ball" is a case where the special symbol is on standby, and there is no holding memory. Therefore, if "no operation holding ball" is reached, the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H)" indicating the state of "no operation holding ball" ( Step S417).

When the special symbol operation status when the state of "no operation holding ball" is "waiting (01H)" (step S417: NO) (processing during special symbol confirmation time of FIG. 16A described later) (See step S472 during), the special symbol operation status is switched to "standby (00H)" (step S418). Then, as a production control command, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the production control unit 24 (step S419), and the special symbol variation start process is exited. When the production control unit 24 receives the above-mentioned customer waiting command, a demo movie for explanation of the game related to the gaming machine 1 and its introduction (demonstration) is played based on a predetermined execution condition “customer waiting production (demo screen )” appears. Specifically, after receiving the customer waiting command, the game is not started, that is, the operation holding ball does not occur (without receiving the holding addition command), a predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) When the time has passed, the customer waiting performance is displayed. Until the waiting time (180 seconds) until the start of customer waiting is elapsed, the display state of the decoration stop symbol stopped after the end of the symbol variable display game is continuously displayed, and the decoration lamp 45 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern. Then, the speaker 43 presents a "demo start waiting effect" that is in a mute state (may be performing a predetermined sound effect), and this state is maintained until the customer waiting effect starts. Moreover, after the start of the customer waiting effect (demo screen), the effect control unit 24 ends the customer waiting effect and shifts to the "power saving mode" when a predetermined transition condition (power saving mode transition condition) is satisfied. In the case of this embodiment, after the customer waiting effect (demo screen) is started, the operation hold ball does not occur, and a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses without switching to the menu screen (game setting screen) , The effect mode is switched to the power saving mode, and the liquid crystal display device 36 is caused to display a power saving screen (for example, a character display of "power saving" on the liquid crystal screen), and a part of the decorative lamp 45 or other effect LEDs Control to turn off all lights (power saving control).

When the special figure 1 operation reserved sphere number or the special figure 2 operation reserved sphere number is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are sequentially executed. In addition, regarding the processing method of steps S403 to S416 described below, the contents are substantially the same except that the special figure 1 operation holding sphere is targeted or the special figure 2 operation holding sphere is targeted. Are the same. Therefore, in order to avoid redundant description, unless otherwise necessary, the operation-reserving ball for which the process is targeted will be described without distinction.

When the process proceeds to step S403, 1 is subtracted from the number of operation-holding balls on the special drawing side used for the current variable display operation (step S403), and a "holding subtraction command" including the information on the number of operation-holding balls after subtraction is issued to the effect control unit 24. (Step S404).

Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type on the fluctuation start side this time, and if the special figure 1 is the fluctuation start side, "00H", and if the special figure 2 is the fluctuation start side. For example, "01H" is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

Next, the reservation data stored in the reservation storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the reservation 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processes of steps S406 to S407, the pending data stored in the pending storage area (reserved 1 storage area) corresponding to the number of pending storages n=1 is read and stored in the random number storage area for determination of the RAM in the area. , The pending data stored in the pending storage areas corresponding to the pending n storage areas (n=2, 3, 4) are stored in the pending storage areas corresponding to'n-1' (step S406), and the pending data is held. The four storage areas are cleared to provide an empty area (step S407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol variable display game matches the order of the operation holding balls number n (n=1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation holding balls acquired at the time of winning the start mouth are stored in any of the holding memories. It is possible to identify whether or not it corresponds to the area, and it is possible to hold and store a new operation holding ball.

Next, a game state information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the game state information transmission process, a “game state designation command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The game state designation command here includes game state information capable of specifying the game state at the start of the game. When the production control unit 24 receives the game state designation command, it grasps the game state based on the information included in the command, and manages the production mode in a manner consistent with the game state managed by the main control unit 20 side. To do. The game state information included in the game state designation command may be the minimum necessary information when performing the intended game process, for example, information including the current internal game state and/or the current variation pattern selection mode. can do. Further, as the game state designating command, it is possible to transmit an "internal game information command" capable of identifying the gaming state determination number YJ and/or a "sorting mode designating command" capable of identifying the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode). can do.

Further, here, if necessary, "time saving number command" including information about special symbol time saving number counter (time saving number information) and "ST number command" including information concerning special symbol probability variation number counter (ST number information) Sent. Based on the information included in these commands, the performance control unit 24 grasps the remaining number of shortening times or the number of remaining STs, and visually informs the remaining number of shortening times or the number of remaining STs. "Countdown display)" can be controlled to appear. Specifically, as the remaining number display effect, "remaining shortened time display effect" is displayed in the time saving mode, and "remaining ST number display effect" is displayed in the ST mode. It should be noted that the hourly count command and the ST count command transmitted in the present process are counter values that have not been subtracted for the current game (the counter subtraction process is performed in the special cases shown in FIGS. 16A to 16B related to the end of the game). During the symbol confirmation time processing (performed in S479 and S484), the effect control unit 24 appropriately performs decrement processing on the grasped counter value, and the remaining number display effect can be displayed (described later). The same applies to the ceiling count command). However, in the case of this embodiment, the hour/hour count command is transmitted when the special symbol hour/hour count counter is other than zero (the hour/hour count counter≠0), and the ST number command is also the special symbol probability variation counter other than zero. Sent when the probability variation counter value is not 0. Of course, even if the counter value is zero, a configuration may be adopted in which a time saving command and an ST command including information that is zero are transmitted.

In addition, depending on the game state, it is possible to determine whether to send only the short-time count command, the ST count command, or both commands. However, when an infinite ceiling privilege is given, specifically, there is no limit on the number of hours saved, "infinite time reduction", "infinite probability variation" or "infinite latent probability" with no limit on the number of STs, or If there is no limit on the number of times (65536 times, etc.) and the time saving count and ST count can be regarded as "infinite count", an infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation, or infinite latent probability is given, and the gaming state related to the privilege In the (heaven mode) in the present embodiment, in order to reduce the control load, the time saving command and the ST command may not be transmitted. Also, when the short-time state or the probability variation state given by the big-hit winning is to continue until the next big-hit, similarly, the time-shortening number command and the ST-number command may not be transmitted.

Further, the "remaining number display effect" can be configured to appear in any of the game modes of the time saving mode, the ST mode, and the heaven mode. In addition, as for the remaining number display effect related to the infinite system, it is preferable to use an effect mode for notifying that the remaining number is infinite. For example, if it is an image display effect, it is "remaining ∞ times" or "continue to next big hit".

(About the display of the number of remaining ceilings)
Further, in the game state information transmission process of step S408, a "ceiling number command" including remaining ceiling game number information (information regarding a ceiling counter described later) is also transmitted. The effect control unit 24 grasps the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached based on the information included in the ceiling number command, and controls the "remaining ceiling number display effect" to appear. In the case of the present embodiment, the remaining ceiling number display effect appears in the form of a countdown display during the aura mode (aura effect mode).

The above-mentioned "remaining ceiling number display effect" can appear during all or a part of the monitoring target (counting) period of the ceiling game. In the present embodiment, it is possible to appear in “during the general mode” and/or “during the precursor mode”. Further, when the remaining ceiling number display effect is displayed in the normal mode, different effect modes can be set in the general mode and the sign mode. For example, during the general mode, the number of remaining ceilings is reported in a small display area at the corner of the LCD screen (the countdown display is displayed small). It is possible to make a notification (large display of the countdown display).

(Processing route when the set value is normal: a processing route that follows S420)
Next, it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S409). If the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S409: ≠5AH), the above “setting value command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and then the ceiling function management process shown in FIG. 13 is executed (step S420).

<13. Ceiling function management process: Figure 13>
The ceiling function management process (step S420) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the ceiling function management process (step S420). This ceiling function management processing is mainly processing for managing the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games.

In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the “ceiling counter” is zero (step S901). This ceiling counter is a counter for managing (monitoring) the number of remaining ceiling games, and in the case of the present embodiment, is used as a counter for managing the number of games that triggers the setting of data relating to ceiling privilege grant ( Steps S903 to S904 described later (ceiling flag is turned ON), see step S915 in FIG. 15 showing details of the game state transition preparation process (step S412) in FIG. The “ceiling counter” functions as a counting unit that counts the number of executions, the number of establishments, or the number of occurrences of a specific event, and also functions as a functional unit that monitors the arrival of a ceiling activation trigger (ceiling privilege grant trigger). The term "specific event" used here refers to the execution of a symbol variation display game (hit variation or loss variation), big hit or small hit or loss winning, transition to a specific game state (transition to a specific game mode or specification) To a variation pattern selection mode, or to a specific internal game state), execution of a big hit game or a small hit, and a specific event such as establishment of a specific condition related to the game. In the present embodiment, the value of the ceiling counter is monitored to determine the arrival of the ceiling function activation trigger. Such a counting means, for example, in a modified example 1 and a modified example 2 (FIG. 33, FIG. 34, grant modes (α) to (μ)) of the privilege granting mode, which will be described later, triggers a ceiling or grants a predetermined privilege. It is used as a functional unit to monitor the arrival of opportunities.

When the ceiling counter is zero (step S901: YES), the ceiling function management process is directly terminated without doing anything. The initial value is set in the ceiling counter when the RAM is cleared by the area RAM clear (step S031) during the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 8 described above, or from another game mode to the normal mode. This is the case when shifting, that is, when the internal gaming state shifts to the normal state (see steps S481 and S486 in FIG. 16B described later).

On the other hand, if the ceiling counter is not zero (step S901: NO), the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S902), and if the subtraction result is not zero (step S903: NO), the ceiling function management process is skipped and the value is zero. If so (step S903: YES), the ceiling flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S904). This ceiling flag is a flag for designating whether or not the ceiling counter has become zero, and is used in the game state transition preparation process of step S412 described later (see step S915 of FIG. 15). By the above, the ceiling function management process is completed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12 again, when the ceiling function management processing of step S420 is finished, then, the special electric auditors product activation determination random number determination processing is executed (step S410). In this special electric auditors product operation determination random number determination process, a "hit lottery at the start of variation" is executed using the jackpot determination random number value and targeting the operation holding balls provided for the current variation display operation. The basic processing procedure of this processing is the same processing procedure as the random number determination processing of step S318 of FIG. 11 already described, and therefore will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

Here, first, based on the special symbol operation confirmation data, the hit random number determination table on the side to be processed this time (for example, if the special figure 1 side is the process target, the hit random number table for special figure 1) is acquired. Next, the jackpot determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and a winning lottery is executed based on the jackpot determination random number value and the hit random number determination table. If the lottery result is "big hit", the big hit determination flag is set to "5AH", and if the "small hit" is hit, the small hit determination flag is set to "5AH". If none of the "winning" is won, that is, if "missing", "00H" is set to both the big hitting determination flag and the small hitting determination flag.

Next, the ceiling activation management process shown in FIG. 14 is executed (step S421).

<14. Ceiling activation management process: Figure 14>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in FIG. In this ceiling activation management processing, necessary setting processing relating to ceiling privilege granting is performed.

In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the big hit determination flag is in the ON state, that is, whether or not the current game result is “big hit” (step S920).

If the big hit determination flag is not in the ON state (step S911: ≠5AH), then it is determined whether or not the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S921). The "ceiling activation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not the ceiling function is activated (whether or not the ceiling privilege is given), and when the flag is in the ON state, the ceiling privilege is given. When the flag is in the OFF state, the ceiling privilege is not given. The ceiling activation flag is a flag that is set to the ON state when the ceiling counter becomes zero in the game state transition preparation process of step S412 described later (step of FIG. 15 showing details of the game state transition preparation process). See S915-S916). If this ceiling activation flag is ON, it is determined that the ceiling activation trigger has arrived in this game (step S921:=5AH), and the processing necessary to grant the ceiling privilege (steps S922 to S925) is performed. To be executed. On the other hand, if the ceiling activation flag is not in the ON state (step S921: ≠5AH), it is determined that the ceiling activation timing has not arrived, and the ceiling activation management process is exited without doing anything.

When the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state (step S921:=5AH), the processing required for ceiling privilege granting (ceiling activation) is executed. Here, first, the value of each state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process (step S412) described later is set in the corresponding state flag and counter (step S922: state flag setting process). As a result, the specified ceiling privilege state is controlled. In the case of the present embodiment, a finite time reduction (time reduction state of 100 times) is specified, and the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from the precursor mode "01H" to the ceiling mode "06H". Has become. Then, as the end process when the ceiling privilege is given, each state buffer is cleared (step S923: various setting processes when the ceiling is activated), and then the ceiling flag and the ceiling activation flag are set to the OFF state (00H) (step S923). S924 to S925). Next, the game state information transmission process (step S926) is executed, and the ceiling activation management process is exited. In the game state information transmission processing here, a game state designation command including finite time saving (time saving state) information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Thereby, with the start of the current game (1000th game), it is controlled to a finite time shortened state, and the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the ceiling mode is selected in the special symbol variation pattern creating process (step S413) described later, and the ceiling production mode The production below will be revealed.

Returning to the description of step S911, when the big hit determination flag is in the ON state (step S911:=5AH), the ceiling activation management process is exited without doing anything. Therefore, when the big hit is won, even in the ceiling game, it is controlled to the "ceiling activation prohibited state", and the process when the big win is won is preferentially executed. Therefore, in order to be granted the ceiling privilege, it is a condition that the user has been addicted for 1000 games. As described above, in the present embodiment, the monitoring target game section of the number of consecutive games (the number of consecutive loss) is set to 1000 games in the normal mode (normal state), and the ceiling privilege is given when the game is addicted. ing.

(Modification 1 of the timing of generating the ceiling privilege)
When the jackpot is won, the ceiling privilege may be given without controlling the ceiling function to the prohibited state. However, in this case, the ceiling privilege is limited to this game (one game only). This is because the jackpot game will start after the end of this game. However, even if the ceiling privilege is only for one game, if the time saving state or the probability variation state accompanied by the state with the electric support is given, the benefit of the electric support is provided until the end of the present pattern variation display game. Can receive. Specifically, there is an advantage that it is easy to win a prize in the lower starting port 35, and an operation holding ball on the special map 2 side is easily generated. When a gaming state accompanied by a state with electric support is given as a ceiling benefit, at least the “right-handed instruction image 779” shown in FIG. 7 can be displayed in this game to encourage the player to right-handed. preferable.

(Modification 2 of the timing of generating the ceiling privilege)
In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the ceiling benefit is given when the game starts is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ceiling benefit may be provided when the game ends. That is, the configuration is such that the ceiling game is triggered when the ceiling game ends. In the case of this modified example, the ceiling privilege is immediately granted after the symbol variation display game is over. For example, when the ceiling privilege is finite time saving, the time saving can be started immediately after the end of 1000 games. If the ceiling privilege is “forced hit”, the big hit game (forced hit game) by forced hit is started after 1000 games have ended. When the ceiling is triggered when the game ends, the ceiling activation management process (step S421) is performed, for example, during a special symbol confirmation time process (FIG. 16B), which will be described later, relating to a process at the time of ending the symbol variation display game. It may be executed after the process of step S495.

(Modified Example 3 of Ceiling Benefit Generation Timing)
Further, in the present embodiment, the ceiling privilege is explained to be given to the 1000th game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ceiling is based on the fact that the second grant condition is satisfied after the first grant condition is satisfied. You may grant a privilege. For example, when 1000 games are addicted (the first grant condition is satisfied), the ceiling privilege grant right is granted, and the ceiling privilege is granted after the predetermined number of precursor games have been exhausted (the ceiling privilege grant is temporarily suspended, and a plurality of games are suspended). I plan ahead). In this case, a plurality of kinds of precursor games can be provided (for example, 1 to 16 games), and the precursor games number can be determined by a lottery (a precursor game number lottery). When the number of precursor games is determined by lottery, the lottery probabilities of the precursor games may be the same in all settings (settings 1 to 6), but it is preferable to determine the probability of lottery according to the set value. For example, the higher the set value is, the easier it is to select a relatively smaller number of games, and the lower the set value is, the easier it is to select a relatively larger number of games. If set, it is possible to give the player a setting estimation element depending on the difference in the number of games. Further, when a specific number of precursor games (for example, 7 games) is selected, the lottery probability according to the set value can be determined, such as high setting confirmation or setting 6 confirmation.

(Modification Example 4 of Ceiling Benefit Timing)
In Modification 3 described above, an example in which the ceiling privilege granting right is temporarily suspended until the predetermined number of precursor games is exhausted, that is, an example in which the right suspension period depends on the number of times the game is executed has been described. However, the right suspension period may not depend on the number of times the game is executed, but may depend on the passage of time. For example, this is a “timed type” ceiling providing form in which a ceiling privilege is provided when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the ceiling game. Specifically, the ceiling privilege is given at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game related to the ceiling game. In this case, by utilizing the interval time from the start of the ceiling game to the start of the ceiling privilege, an effect for giving advance notice that a finite time saving will occur soon, for example, displaying the "right-handed instruction image 779" shown in FIG. It is possible to allow the player who is hitting left to urge him to hit right, so as not to waste the hit.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12 again, when the ceiling activation management process of step S421 is finished, the special stop symbol creation process is executed (step S411). In this special stop symbol creation process, the winning lottery result of step S410 and the random number for special symbol determination are used to execute "a symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation". The basic processing procedure of this processing is the same as the special stop symbol data creation processing (step S319) shown in FIG. 11, which has already been described, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate to avoid redundant description.

Here, first, the special symbol operation confirmation data (special symbol type) and the symbol table (any one of the big hit symbol table, the small hit symbol table, and the lost symbol table) corresponding to the winning lottery result of the step S410 is selected. For example, if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H and the big hit determination flag is 5AH, that is, if the fluctuation start side this time is'special map 1 side' and the winning lottery result is'big hit', The “big hit symbol table for FIG. 1” is selected. Then, the random number for special symbol determination stored in the random number storage area for determination is acquired, and a symbol lottery is executed based on the selected symbol table and the random number for special symbol determination, and the special symbol determination which is the lottery result. The data and the special stop symbol number are stored in the corresponding areas of the area RAM.

When the special stop symbol creation process of step S411 is completed, a game state transition preparation process is executed (step S412).

<15. Game state transition preparation process: FIG. 15>
The game state transition preparation process (step S412) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process.

In this game state transition preparation process, when a big hit is won, a process for storing data for designating the destination game state after the big hit game (see FIG. 4) in a predetermined buffer (state buffer) (Steps S911 to S914) If there is a loss and the ceiling flag is in the ON state, the processing is divided into processing for storing data for designating the ceiling privilege in a predetermined buffer (steps S915, S916, S917). ing. First, the processing contents of the former case of “winning the big hit” will be described.

(If you win the jackpot)
When the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (step S911:=5AH), the "game state transition table selection table" shown in FIG. 22 is acquired (step S912). Next, referring to the obtained big hit game state transition table selection table, the current game state (game state at the time of winning (game state determination number YJ in this embodiment)) and hit type (special symbol determination data) The game state transition table (one of JTTBL-1 to 5) corresponding to the above is acquired (step S913), and the data set in the obtained game state transition table is stored in various state buffers (step S914: state). Buffer setting process). In this gaming state transition table, various data for shifting to a desired gaming state are defined. JTTBL-1 to 5 are provided in the game state transition table according to the present embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22, JTTBL-1 is "time saving A" and JTTBL-2 is "time saving B". , JTTBL-3, "probability variation A", JTTBL-4, "probability variation B", and JTTBL-5, various data for transitioning to "probability variation C".

The value stored in the above state buffer is read by a jackpot end process shown in FIG. 18 (see step S509 of FIG. 17, see step S592 of FIG. 18 for details) which will be described later, and a predetermined storage area of the RAM 203 ( It is stored in a flag storage area or a counter storage area corresponding to each state buffer. Thereby, the gaming state after the big hit game (the destination gaming state in FIG. 4) is designated.

The roles of the above various status buffers are as follows.
(Α) "Normal electric utility open extension transition state buffer, normal symbol time shortening transition state buffer, normal symbol probability variation transition state buffer, special symbol time saving state transition state buffer, special symbol probability variation transition state buffer"
ON/OFF designation data of each function for designating the internal game state is set. Specifically, the universal extension open state flag that specifies the operating state of the opening extension function, the normal symbol time saving state flag that specifies the operating state of the normal symbol time saving function, the ordinary specifying the operating state of the normal symbol probability changing function Data for the symbol probability change state flag, the special symbol time saving state flag that specifies the operating state of the special symbol time saving function, the special symbol probability changing state flag that specifies the operation state of the special symbol probability changing function is set.
(Β) “Special symbol time saving counter buffer”
Data for specifying the number of times the special symbol time saving function is activated (data for the special symbol time saving counter) is set.
(Γ) "Special symbol probability variation counter buffer"
Data for designating the number of continuous operation of the special symbol probability variation function (data for the special symbol probability variation counter) is set.
(Δ) "Special symbol variation counter 1-3 buffer"
Data (data for a special symbol variation number counter) for designating the number of continuations of a specific variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is set.
(Ε) “Variable pattern distribution designation number 1 to 3 buffer”
When a predetermined update condition is satisfied, data (data for fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode) that specifies the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) to be updated is set.

For example, if the current game state is "normal state (YJ=00H)" and "probability variation jackpot 2 (5R probability variation ST75)" is won, based on the game state transition table selection table shown in FIG. 21, "JTTBL -4”, that is, the game state transition table for probability change B (see FIG. 22) is acquired. In this case, "5AH (specify ON)" is set in the special electric utility open extension transition state buffer to special symbol probability variation transition state buffer, and "25 times" is set in the special symbol time saving counter buffer, and the special symbol is set. "75 times" is set in the probability variation counter buffer. As a result, the destination game state after the big hit game is designated as "time saving number 25+ST number 75". Also, as the game mode transition designation data, "02H (ST early stage designation)" is set in the variation pattern allocation designation number 1 buffer, and "25 times (ST early mode continuation number)" in the special symbol variation number counter 1 buffer. Is set, and the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number 2 buffer is set to "02H (ST middle board designation)", and the special symbol fluctuation number counter 2 buffer is set to "50 times (ST middle board mode continuation count)". It As a result, the game mode transition form of "ST early mode 25 times ⇒ ST middle mode 50 times ⇒ time saving mode" is designated.

(Modified example of S. ST number/time saving number: The case where the ST number or time saving number differs depending on the set value)
In the present embodiment, the same game state transition table is selected regardless of the set value when the same big hit is won. That is, regardless of the current setting of 1 to 6, for example, when the probability variation big hit 1 is won, the probability variation state (probability variation A (ST100 mode)) designated by JTTBL-3 is entered. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the same big hit is won, it is possible to shift to a probability change state in which the number of STs is different or to shift to a time shortening state in which the number of time saving is different depending on the set value. In this case, at least the data value relating to the special symbol probability variation counter and/or the special symbol time reduction counter may be configured so that different game state transition tables can be selected according to the set value.

Although the case where the same big jackpot is won has been described above, different jackpots may be focused on and the configuration described below may be adopted. For example, the presence or absence of a specific ST number or the presence or absence of a specific time saving number may be determined according to the set value. Specifically, it can be configured such that there is a specific jackpot that gives a specific number of STs in the case of the first set value, and there is no particular jackpot in the case of the second set value. That is, in the case of the first setting value, the "big jackpot" is included in the jackpot lottery target, but in the second setting value, the "specific jackpot" is not included in the jackpot lottery object.

With the above-described configuration, when a specific probability variation big hit (may be a latent probability big hit) or a particular time-short big hit is won, the game play described in (SA) and (SB) below is created. be able to.

(SA) For example, when a specific probability variation jackpot is won, different ST numbers may be set for the respective setting values (settings 1 to 6) (they are shifted to the probability variation state with different ST numbers), or at least Different ST numbers may be set for one set value (at least one set value is shifted to a probability change state of ST number different from other set values). As a typical example, in the case of the former example, when the same probability variation big hit is won, for example, “the number of STs of setting 1 to 6 is 100 to 105” (one of the set values is determined according to the number of STs. Case). In the latter example, if the same probability variation big hit is won, for example, “Settings 1 to 5 are ST times 100 times, setting 6 is 101 times” (a case where setting number 6 is confirmed by ST times 101 times) and “ Settings 1 to 4 are ST times 100 times, settings 5 and 6 are 101 times" (a case where the high setting is confirmed by the ST times 101 times), "at least the first set value is 100 ST times and the second set value is 105 times. Times, etc.
In the case of paying attention to different probability variation big hits, for example, “of the hit types targeted for the big hit lottery, if the first hit is the first ST number (for example, ST100 times), the second win is won. Is set to a second ST number (for example, 105 times) different from the first ST number, and in the case of the first set value, at least the second hit is not included.”
In the case of these configurations, when a certain probability variation jackpot is won, the number of STs varies depending on the set value, so that it is possible to suggest the setting according to the number of STs. Specifically, in the case of a specific number of STs, one of the settings 1 to 6 is found, or in a specific setting value area (low setting area, high setting area, setting 1 negative, setting 6 confirmation, etc.) It turns out. In other words, it is possible to create a novel game property in which the function (setting suggestion) of the setting suggesting effect is created using the “ST number of times”.

(SB) Similarly, when a specific time/short win is won, similarly, different time/hour counts may be set for each set value (settings 1 to 6), or at least one set value sets different time/hour counts. You may. Further, in the case of paying attention to different probability variation big hits, for example, “of the hit types targeted for the big hit lottery, if the first win is won, the first saved time is 100 times (for example, 100 saved hours) and the second win is won. In this case, the second shortening number (for example, 105 times) different from the first shortening number is set, and in the case of the first set value, at least the second hit is not included.” In these cases as well, similar to the configuration of (SA) described above, when the number of times is a specific shortening time, it is one of the settings 1 to 6, or a specific set value area (low setting area, high setting area, It is possible to suggest settings according to the number of times saved, such as setting 1 negative, setting 6 confirmed, etc., and the novelty of creating a function (setting suggestion) of setting suggestion production using "time saving times". It is possible to create a certain playability.

It should be noted that the specific jackpot in this example may be one or a plurality of jackpots. As the specific jackpot, it is preferable to use a jackpot with the lowest symbol lottery rate (for example, probability variation jackpot 1) or a jackpot with the lowest profitability (profit state). The reason is as follows. The jackpot with the lowest symbol lottery rate is positioned as a "rare jackpot" that cannot be won. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, it is preferable to provide the player with advantageous information of “setting suggestion” as a privilege. In addition, the big hit with the lowest advantage (profit state) has a low profit even if the hard hit is to win the big hit, and it becomes a disappointing big hit for the player, which may reduce the player's willingness to play. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, it is preferable to provide advantageous information of "setting suggestion" to the player to prevent the player's willingness to play.

The above (SA) configuration can be, for example, the following (SA-1) configuration.
(SA-1)
Lottery means for executing a lottery targeting a plurality of types of hits when the starting means detects a game ball,
A symbol display means for performing variable display of symbols and displaying a lottery result by the lottery means in a stop display mode of the symbols,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit, a hit game execution control means for executing and controlling a hit game,
After the winning game is over, until the number of fluctuations of the symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit number, a high probability state that the lottery probability of winning is a higher probability than a predetermined normal probability (specifically, high probability). Gaming state with probability state: probability variation state or latent probability state) equipped with probability variation control means that can be controlled,
A gaming machine in which the probability that the result of the winning lottery is a predetermined result is different according to the setting value that can be changed in a plurality of stages,
The setting value that can be changed in multiple steps includes at least a first setting value and a second setting value,
The probability fluctuation control means,
When the set value is the first set value, when the first hit is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is controlled until the first upper limit number of times is reached,
When the set value is the second set value, when the first winning is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is maintained until the second upper limit number different from the first upper limit number is reached. It can be configured to control.

Further, the above (SA-1) may be configured as the following (SA-2).
(SA-2)
The probability fluctuation control means,
When the first winning is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is controlled until the first upper limit number of times is reached,
When the second winning is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is controlled until the second upper limit number different from the first upper limit number is reached,
In the case where the set value is the first set value, at least the second winning is not included in the lottery result by the lottery means.

In the case of the above configuration (SB), instead of the probability variation control means, "the entry state into the starting means is more advantageous than the normal game state (normal state), the entry advantageous state (electric support state) "Advantageous game state control means for controlling to advantageous game state (time saving state)" is provided. And
The advantageous game state control means,
When the set value is the first set value, when the first hit is won by the lottery means, the advantageous game state is controlled until the first upper limit number is reached,
When the set value is the second set value, when the first hit is won by the lottery means, until the second upper limit number different from the first upper limit number is reached, the advantageous game state is set. It may be configured to control.

(When the jackpot is non-winning (miss) and the ceiling flag is ON)
Returning to the explanation of FIG. When the jackpot determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S911: ≠5AH) and the ceiling flag is in the ON state (step S915:=5AH), the ceiling activation start pretreatment (pretreatment for granting the ceiling privilege) As a part of, the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S916). In this process, the ceiling activation flag set to the ON state is confirmed in the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in the next game.

Next, the "ceiling game state transition table" shown in FIG. 23 is acquired (step S917). In FIG. 23, JTTBL-6 to JTTBL11 (finite time shortening to infinite latent accuracy) are illustrated as the ceiling game state transition table corresponding to various ceiling benefits. Actually, a necessary game state transition table for the ceiling may be provided according to the ceiling privilege type.

Next, the data set in the acquired game state transition table for ceiling is stored in the above-mentioned state buffer (step S914: state buffer setting process). The values stored in these state buffers are read by the ceiling activation management processing (step S421, see step S922 in FIG. 14), and are stored in the predetermined storage areas (each of the RAM 203) in the same manner as when the jackpot is won. The flag storage area and the counter storage area corresponding to the state buffer of FIG. As a result, the gaming state relating to the ceiling privilege is designated. Note that “* (times)” and “*(H)” shown in the figure are arbitrary data values, meaning that appropriate values can be set according to the game characteristics and design values. For example, in the case of the present embodiment, “finite time reduction (100 hours reduction)” is representatively described as the ceiling privilege, and in this case, the data value as shown in the “finite time reduction” column in the figure is set. Has been.

When both the big hit determination flag and the ceiling flag are in the OFF state (00H) (step S911 is ≠5AH and step S915≠5AH), the game state transition preparation process is directly terminated without doing anything.

Returning again to the explanation of the special symbol variation start process of FIG. When the game state transition preparation process of step S412 is finished, then a special symbol variation pattern creation process is executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, at least the current game state and the variation pattern distribution table according to the symbol lottery result (special symbol determination data) in step S411 is acquired. In the case of the present embodiment, the current set value, the current variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), the symbol lottery result, and the number of operation holding balls (excluding the operation holding balls used for the current variable display operation, the existing operation holding balls The “variable pattern allocation table” corresponding to the numbers 0 to 3) is acquired.

(Variation pattern distribution table: FIGS. 24 to 27)
24 to 27 show fluctuation pattern allocation tables. FIG. 24 shows a variation pattern distribution table for each of “general use, precursor, ceiling, time saving, and heaven saving time”, and FIG. 25 shows variation of each hit for “ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST end stage”. FIG. 26 is a pattern variation table for each variation variation of “general purpose, precursor, ceiling, time saving, and heaven time saving”, and FIG. 27 is for ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST late stage. FIG. 3 shows each “loose variation pattern distribution table” for use in. Further, "FB1 to FB17" shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 are the hit variation pattern distribution table types selected at the time of winning, and "FH1 to FH21" shown in FIGS. 26 and 27 are the hit variation selected at the time of loss. The pattern distribution table type is shown.

It should be noted that "Heavenly Hours" (see "Time Saving/Heaven Hours" column) in the fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIGS. 24 and 26 is a table common to the time saving mode, but the fluctuation pattern is exclusively for Heaven Hours. A distribution table may be provided. In addition, a dedicated variation pattern distribution table can be provided as appropriate according to the ceiling privilege. For example, in the case of finite probability variation or infinite probability variation, there is a "variation pattern distribution table dedicated to heaven probability variation", and in the case of finite latent probability or infinite latent probability, "variation pattern distribution table dedicated to heaven latent probability". In the case of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the variation pattern distribution table common to the time saving mode is selected in order to give “finite time saving” as the ceiling privilege. Although not shown, the fluctuation pattern allocation table is provided with a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to set values (settings 1 to 6). That is, the probability that one or more specific fluctuation patterns are randomly selected may differ depending on the set value, and it becomes possible to give a setting estimation element depending on the appearance rate of the effect related to the fluctuation pattern. There is.

As shown in FIG. 24 to FIG. 27, in each fluctuation pattern distribution table, one or a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns include a fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode), the number of operation-holding balls (operation-holding used for the current fluctuation display operation). Excluding the balls, the existing number of operation-holding balls), the symbol lottery result, and the random number for the fluctuation pattern are determined in association with each other. As shown in the figure, various types of variation patterns are provided. The expectation level for winning is as follows. The relationship between the same type of reach is “N reach A<N reach B” between N reach and “SP reach A<SP reach B<SP reach C” between SP reach. The relationship between different types of reach is “N reach A<N reach B<SP reach A<SP reach B<SP reach C<special reach”. In addition, when pseudo-relations and other notice productions appear in a complex manner, the winning expectation level changes. Reach B or C may be exceeded. The agitation reach is mainly provided as a special reach that is selected when a special figure 2 is won when a player hits left in the normal mode. It should be noted that, in the drawing, the N reach has no pseudo connection, but in reality, N reach with pseudo connection (for example, pseudo 2+N reach A, pseudo 2+N reach B, etc.) is included, and pseudo 3 or more. The occurrence of SP reach is confirmed when the above is accompanied.

The variation pattern determination processing method is basically the same as the previously described variation pattern determination processing (starting mouth winning random number determination processing (step S320 in FIG. 11)). Here, one of the fluctuation patterns is determined in accordance with the fluctuation pattern random number value by referring to the fluctuation pattern allocation table (the fluctuation pattern designation command data shown in FIGS. 24 to 27). COM2 is obtained). Then, when the variation pattern is determined, the corresponding variation time is determined (see the column "TIME" in the figure). This variation time (execution time of the symbol variation display game) is set in the "special symbol auditors product operation timer" which is the timer management area of the RAM in the area.

The information on the fluctuation pattern determined in this way is at least another winning/lottery winning result (in the case of the present embodiment, detailed symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designating command), The current game state, variable time information, and execution designation information of a particular notice effect (presence or absence of reach effect and its type, pseudo-relation designation information, etc.) can be included. The main control unit 20 creates a “variation pattern designation command” (“COM2” shown in FIGS. 24 to 27) that allows the content to be specified, and transmits this to the effect control unit 24. The information included in the fluctuation pattern designation command is used when the effect control unit 24 determines various effects (preliminary effects that are changing, setting suggesting effects that are changing) that should appear during the current pattern change display game. Used for.

(Regarding characteristic elements related to fluctuation patterns)
Here, the characteristic elements related to the variation pattern will be described, focusing on the points having a plurality of types of ST modes and the point having a ceiling function.

The fluctuation state (high speed, medium speed, low speed fluctuation state) in each game mode is realized exclusively by the fluctuation pattern group and its selection rate defined in the lost fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIGS. 26 to 27. Therefore, it is possible to change the fluctuation state under each game mode depending on what kind of fluctuation pattern type is defined in the fluctuation pattern allocation table. For example, referring to the “ST-during use variation variation pattern distribution table” shown in FIG. 27, in the early stage of ST, normal variation on the special figure 2 side (variation pattern belonging to the normal variation pattern) in order to realize a high-speed variation state. The shortest variation pattern having the shortest variation time of 2s is selected with high probability. Further, in the middle ST and the last ST, a variation pattern having a longer variation time (normal variation 3 s, normal variation 4 s) is selected with a high probability. Realize the state. Further, as shown in FIG. 27, at the time of losing, the reach is easily selected in the order of the ST late stage, the ST intermediate stage, and the ST early stage mode (in the case of this embodiment, the reach selectivity is zero in the ST early stage), and The variation time is also relatively long, and from this point as well, in order of the ST early stage, the ST middle stage, and the ST end stage mode, the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game becomes relatively long. It has become.

Further, in the ST early mode, only the normal variation type is selected when losing, and only the reach (direct hit reach) is selected when winning. In other words, during the early stage of ST (within 1 to 25 games), the player is “accurate” when the reach is reached. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the winning is achieved during the early stage of the ST, the common variation pattern distribution table “FB9” is selected regardless of the special symbol type, the operation reserve ball number, and the hit type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that different variation pattern distribution tables can be selected depending on the type of big hit, such as the ST middle stage mode and ST end stage mode.

Further, by utilizing the fact that there are a plurality of types of ST modes, the following configurations (I) and (II) can be adopted.
(I) A Tcode dedicated to the final round of the ST mode may be provided, and a specific fluctuation pattern (final twist fluctuation) may be selected in the final round. The Tcode dedicated to the final round can be provided in at least one ST mode of the ST early stage mode, the ST middle stage mode, and the ST late stage mode. For example, “ST opening early end fan A, ST middle end final fan A, ST final end fan A” shown in notes 2 to 4 of FIG. 25 (at the time of big hit), and “notes 2 to 4” of FIG. "ST in the early stages, B in the middle stages, ST in the middle stages, B in the last stages in ST stages". In this case, the following effects can be brought out. Taking the final game of ST early mode (25th game in ST) as an example, in the final game, "ST early final agitation A" is selected at the time of a big hit, and "ST early final agitation" at the time of losing. B" is selected. At this time, in any of the symbol variation display games related to the final twists A and B in the early stage of ST, a common effect is revealed for a predetermined time from the start of the game (until a predetermined change time elapses from the start of the game), Try to fuel the expectation of being a loss or a big hit. Then, if it is a loss, it is stopped as it is without losing reach with "Loose pattern (Bare pattern)", and if it is a big hit, it is stopped with "Reach pattern (hit pattern)" (in this example, reach is It will be certain when it hangs). In addition, the variation time of the final twist A (at the time of hitting) and the final twist B (at the time of losing) may be the same, but the variation time at the time of a big hit is longer than that at the time of losing, and after winning the reach, winning Congratulations on blessing, and specific performance such as promotion display that can notify the non-promotion display from even pattern alignment to odd pattern alignment or even from non-promotion to even pattern alignment depending on the type of jackpot that was won Preferably.

(II) When the winning jackpot type (may be one or a plurality of specific jackpot types) is used as a secretive state in the production, and the transfer destination game state is made a secret state (in the production during the symbol variation display game and in the winning performance) , If the winning jackpot type is kept secret), for example, in the final game of the ST opening mode (ST25th game), when the player loses the game, whether or not the ST mode ends or is continued by using the ST opening final twist The "continuation-inspired production" is revealed. For example, if the current game mode is the ST25 mode, as a result of the continuation-inspiring effect, a continuation failure effect that notifies ST discontinuation is displayed, and if it is the ST75 or ST100 mode, ST continuation is informed. Show continuous success production.

Any of the configurations (I) and (II) described above can stimulate the player's sense of tension in the ST final game and improve the fun of the game in the ST mode. Further, the above-mentioned “final strain fluctuation” may be selectable in all ST modes or some ST modes. However, in the ST mode that is in the “fast change state” such as the ST early mode, it is preferable that the final swing change can be selected. Under the "high-speed fluctuation state", if the player continues to lose without winning the jackpot, the ST (probably changing state) will be finished in no time, and the player will feel disappointed. Therefore, it is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the amusement of the game to select "final fluctuation" for the last time so as to maintain the player's tension. Further, the present invention is not limited to the ST final game, and may be configured such that the “final agitation” is continuously selected from one or more games before the final game. For example, during the third game of the ST23 to ST25 games, "final fanning" is continuously selected.

(Regarding the fluctuation pattern related to the ceiling mode)
Further, referring to the loss variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 26, in the ceiling mode, as shown in the column “ceiling” in the drawing, the common “ceiling variation” is irrespective of the special figure classification and the number of operation-sustaining balls. Is to be selected. However, in the case of the present embodiment, since there are a plurality of types of loss, "common ceiling fluctuation" is selected regardless of "special figure type, number of operation-holding balls, and type of loss". The reason for doing this is as follows. First, when the ceiling is reached, it is preferable that a common ceiling effect is displayed regardless of at least the special map type and the number of operation-reserving balls, and the ceiling is activated (the ceiling privilege is given). Secondly, for one ceiling game (one rotation only), it is necessary to prepare a plurality of types of variation pattern distribution tables or to produce effects based on these tables, because the control load increases and the control load is reduced. It is not preferable from the viewpoint of. Further, also in the case of a hit, as in the case of the above-mentioned "loss", from the viewpoint of performance and control load reduction, the following configuration is adopted. As described above, in the ceiling game (1000th game), when the big hit happens to be a big hit, the effect related to the ceiling effect mode is not displayed but in the normal effect mode (for example, the general mode). It is preferable that the effect at the time of winning related to the middle or the omen mode is displayed (see the description in “7-4-1. About effect in ceiling mode” above). Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in the column of “ceiling” of the loss variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 26, when the big hit is won, the variation pattern of the hit in the normal mode (general mode and/or omen mode) Of the distribution tables FB1 to FB4, “FB2” is selected. In addition, not only "FB2" but any of FB1 to FB4 may be used.

(Regarding the fluctuation pattern related to the precursor mode)
Further, focusing on the “precursor mode” of the loss variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 26, in the case of this embodiment, the high-speed fluctuation state (the normal mode is the fastest) in the normal mode during the precursor mode. , The average digestion time is the fastest game mode). This is in consideration of the player's feelings. It is considered that most of the players have a strong feeling that "I want to reach the ceiling quickly when I come up here" and "I want to get the ceiling privilege quickly" when the ceiling is approaching. Therefore, in this embodiment, the average digestion time in the precursor mode is shortened. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, when the big hit is won in the precursor mode, as shown in FIG. 24, the hit variation pattern distribution tables FB1 to FB4 which are common to the general mode are adopted. The present invention is not limited to this, and a hit variation pattern distribution table dedicated to the precursor mode may be provided. For example, the “variation per aura” can be provided as the exclusive variation in the aura mode (see Note 2 “variation per aura” in FIG. 24).

When the final game in the omen mode is “miss”, a specific variation pattern (variation pattern having a relatively long variation time) is selected in order to bring out the “preliminary firing guidance notification effect”. The configuration may be possible (see Note 2 “Preliminary final fluctuation” in FIG. 26). This pre-launch guidance notification effect is an effect to instruct "how to hit" in the game before the game in which the state with electric power support occurs occurs. Or a game that causes a reduction in working hours), such as instructing "right-handed" or instructing "left-handed" in the game where there is no electric support, that is, there is actually electric support. The character is different from the notification effect that instructs how to hit in the game in which there is nothing. In this respect, the pre-launch guidance notification effect is an effect peculiar to the gaming machine equipped with the ceiling privilege.

Returning to the description of FIG. When the special symbol variation pattern creation process of step S413 is finished, then, the variation flag corresponding to the variation start side this time is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414). The "changing flag" is a flag that indicates which one of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing, and indicates that the special symbol is changing when the flag is in the ON state (5AH). When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. In the present embodiment, the "special symbol 1 changing flag" corresponding to special figure 1 and the "special symbol 2 changing flag" corresponding to special figure 2 are handled. For example, if the special symbol 1 side is the current processing target (variation start side), the special symbol 1 varying flag is set to ON and the special symbol 2 varying flag is set to OFF.

Next, a decorative symbol designating command that can specify the symbol lottery result information obtained in the special stop symbol creating process of step S411 is acquired, and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the fluctuating side and the winning type (symbol lottery result). This decorative pattern designation command is mainly a combination of decorative patterns when forming a reach state (a pattern type that constitutes the reach pattern), a combination of decorative patterns to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop pattern), It is used when performing a notice effect corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variable display game. When the production control unit 24 receives the variation pattern designating command and the decorative design designating command, based on the information contained in these commands, the decorative design variation display game of this time is started, and various productions during production are controlled. To do.

Then, as a variation start time setting process, the special symbol operation status “during variation (02H)” is switched (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the random number storage area for determination (zero-clear) (step S416). ).

As described above, when the special symbol variation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) in FIG. 10 is performed, and thus the variable display of the special symbol is started. Thereby, the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric auditors product management process (step S095) of FIG.

(Regarding the case where the setting error occurs: the processing route from S409 to S411)
Returning to the description of the determination processing of step S409, the processing content when it is determined that the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) in step S409, that is, when it is determined that a setting error has occurred is described. To do.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the setting error flag is in the ON state in the determination process of step S409, the special electric auditors product operation determination random number determination process (winning lottery) is skipped, and the special stop of step S411 is performed. Proceed to the symbol creation process. That is, when a setting error occurs, the winning lottery at the start of fluctuation is not executed, and the current winning lottery result is always processed as “miss” (forced lose control). In the case of a setting abnormality error, a variation pattern dedicated to the error may be selected, or an existing specific variation pattern may be selected. However, in consideration of the occurrence of a serious error such as a setting error, it is preferable to select not the reach variation but the normal variation only.

<A. Special symbol fluctuation process: Figure 10>
Next, the special symbol changing process (step S307) shown in FIG. 10 will be described.

In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the variation time T of the special symbol set in the special symbol auditors product operation timer has elapsed. If the variation time T has not elapsed (variation time T≠0), since the special symbol is varying, the special symbol varying process is ended without doing anything. If the variation time T of the special symbol has elapsed (variation time T=0), as a production control command, a “fluctuation stop command (BF01H)” indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the production control unit 24. .. When the production control unit 24 receives the variation stop command, the production control unit 24 recognizes that the special symbol variation display game has ended after the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and causes the decorative symbol in the variable display to be stopped (fixed display). As a result, the decorative symbol variable display game is also terminated with the end of the special symbol variable display game.

Then, as a setting process at the time of fluctuation stop of the special symbol, the special symbol determination signal output time (for example, 100 ms), the confirmation display time (for example, 500 ms) are stored in the corresponding area of the RAM in the area, and the special symbol operation status is set. Switch to “during confirmation (03H)” (store 03H in the special symbol operation status) and store the OFF state in the special symbol changing flag. Then, when the setting process when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped is finished, the special symbol changing process is exited. The "special symbol confirmation signal output time" is a margin time for ensuring the output time of the special symbol confirmation signal for notifying that the special symbol is confirmed and displayed from the frame external terminal board 21 to the hall computer HC. Is. Further, the "fixed display time" is the time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state after the variable display of the special symbol is finished.

When the special symbol changing process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric auditors product management process of step S095 of FIG.

<22. Processing during special symbol confirmation time (processing at fluctuation stop): FIGS. 16A and 16B>
Next, the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) will be described. 16A and 16B are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) of FIG.

16A and 16B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol auditors product operation timer is zero (step S471). The "determined display time" is set to the special symbol auditors product operation timer here (see step S307 of the special symbol changing process). Until the special symbol auditors product operation timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process exits during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

If the special symbol auditors product operation timer becomes zero (step S471: YES), the special symbol variable display game is finished, and the special symbol operation status is switched to "standby (01H)" (special symbol operation (01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the current game state information is stored in the game state determination area of the RAM (step S473).

Next, the jackpot determination flag is acquired, and the state of the jackpot determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the jackpot determination flag is ON)
When it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S474:=5AH), various setting processes when the big hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, the big hit determination flag is set to the OFF state (00H), the condition device operation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) assuming that the big hit is won, and in addition, during the big hit game low probability and electric support Set to the state of no state (clear various flags and counters). Further, the ceiling flag and the ceiling activation flag are set to the OFF state (00H), and the ceiling counter is cleared (00H).

(When the big hit determination flag is OFF)
When the big hit judging flag is in the OFF state (00H) in the judgment of the above step S474 (step S474: ≠5AH), the small hit judging flag is then acquired and the state of the small hit judging flag is judged (step S476). When the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S476:≠5AH), that is, in the case of “miss” which is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the process proceeds to step S478.

On the other hand, when the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (5 AH) (step S476:=5 AH), various setting processes when the small hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S477). Here, as various setting processing (small hit game start pre-processing) when the small hit symbol is stopped, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag, and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit medium flag. After finishing the various setting processes when the small hit symbol is stopped, the process proceeds to step S478.

When the process proceeds to step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time saving counter (remaining time saving) is zero (step S478). If the special symbol time saving counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483.

On the other hand, if the special symbol time reduction counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step S479) as a digestion of the current fluctuation number (step S479), and the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction It is determined whether or not it is zero (step S480).

If the special symbol saving time counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), since the number of times the special symbol saving time has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol time saving number counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), the setting process at the time saving end is performed as the number of times the special symbol time saving state has been reached (step S481).

(Setting process at the end of time saving: step S481)
Here, as the setting process at the end of time saving, the electric Chu support function (normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function) is set to the OFF state (university officer open extension status flag, normal symbol saving time) The state flag and the normal symbol probability change state flag are each set to 00H), and the transition setting to the "electric support-free state" is performed. In addition, in order to end the operation of the special symbol time saving function, the special symbol time saving function is set to the OFF state (set to 00H in the special symbol time saving state flag), and the gaming state notification LED output number (state notification of the composite display device 38c The data) stores 00H designating the non-special symbol time saving state (in the case of "01H", the special symbol time saving state designation).

The case where the "setting process at the time saving end" of step S481 is executed is a case where the game mode shifts from the "time saving mode" to the normal mode (general mode), specifically, the internal game state is "time saving state". It is a case of shifting from "to normal state". Therefore, here, the initial value (999 times) is set to the ceiling counter in order to start counting the number of remaining ceiling games with the transition from the next game to the normal state (general mode). In the present embodiment, the game in which the ceiling counter value is zero is the game (999th game) immediately before the ceiling game. In the game immediately before the ceiling game, various setting processes before the ceiling privilege starts, specifically, In the game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 12), the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH), and data for designating the ceiling privilege is stored in each state buffer (FIG. 15). Steps S915 to S917, S914). Then, in the ceiling activation management process (step S421 in FIG. 12) at the start of the next game (ceiling game), the data in the state buffer is read and set in various flags and counters related to the game state designation. (S921-S926 of FIG. 14). As a result, the ceiling privilege is given at the start of the ceiling game. The ceiling counter may be set to "1000" as an initial value. In this case, whether or not the ceiling counter has reached zero, that is, whether or not it is the 1000th game, is monitored. For example, it is possible to directly set the specified data related to the ceiling privilege in various flags and counters without using the status buffer.

(Control process when ceiling benefit is given when the game ends)
Here, in the case where the ceiling privilege is given at the end of the game (when the symbol is stopped), as described above, the “ceiling activation management process (step S421)” which is the subroutine is performed, for example, the symbol variation. After the final process (step S495 described later) of the special symbol confirmation time related to the end of the display game, the ceiling activation management process (step S421) may be executed. In this case, when the ceiling counter is set to 999 as in the present embodiment, the ceiling privilege is given at the end of the 999 game, and when set to 1000, the ceiling privilege is given at the end of the 1000 game. In any case, a specific event related to the game (here, the number of times of losing in the normal state) is counted, and when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, zero), the ceiling function trigger or the ceiling privilege is given. It may be configured such that it can be added. If the method of processing of the present embodiment (see FIGS. 12 to 16B) is adopted, the game start time was used as the ceiling trigger timing in the old model, but the new model end is used as the ceiling trigger timing. This has the advantage that design changes can be facilitated and compatibility between the old model and the new model can be improved.

When the setting process at the end of time saving in step S481 is completed, then the game state update process is executed (step S482). Here, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "05H" in the time saving mode to "00H" in the general mode. The updated game state information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by a game state designation command in step S495 described later. Therefore, when the setting process at the time saving end in step S481 is executed, the game state designation command transmitted in step S495 described later includes information designating the "general mode", and by this game state designation command, The effect control unit 24 recognizes that the time-saving mode (time-saving state) has ended in the current game, and that the next game is to be switched to the general mode (normal state). Thereby, in the next symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the "general mode" is selected, and the effect under the "general effect mode" is revealed.

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST number) is zero (step S483). If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), as the variation number digest of this special symbol, the special symbol probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S484), and the special symbol probability variation after the subtraction It is determined whether the frequency counter is zero (step S485).

If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), since the ST number has not ended, the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything. However, if the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), it is determined that the ST number has ended, and the setting process at the time of completion of the probability variation is executed (step S486). Here, as a setting process at the end of the probability variation, the function relating to the probability variation state is set to the OFF state and the probability variation state is ended. However, the processing content differs depending on the value of the special symbol time saving counter. The details will be described below.

(1) "If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero, and the special symbol time saving counter is not zero", in this case, the ST number is zero in this game and the ST mode ends, but This is a case where the game is shifted to the time saving mode from the next game because the number of times saving time remains. That is, it is the case where the ST number of 25 times is ended during the ST25 mode, or the ST number of 75 times is ended during the ST75 mode (“JTTBL-4, 5” in the gaming state transition table shown in FIG. 22). reference). Therefore, in this case, only the special symbol probability variation function is set to the OFF state (00H) (00H is stored in the special symbol probability variation state flag) The transition setting from the probability variation state to the time saving state is performed, and the game state number YJ is "02H. (Time saving state)". When this processing is executed in the ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated in the subsequent step S491.

(2) On the other hand, "the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero, and the special symbol time saving counter is also zero", in this case, the number of STs in this game is zero, and the saving time is also In the case of zero, that is, in the ST100 mode, the ST100 mode ends in this game (see "JTTBL-3" in the gaming state transition table shown in FIG. 22). Therefore, in this case, as a process required to end the probability variation state, the electric Chu support function (normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function) is set to the OFF state (general electric utility object opening extension state flag, Normal symbol time saving state flag, normal symbol probability variation state flag stores 00H each), also, special symbol time saving function and special symbol probability variation function OFF state (special symbol time saving state flag and special symbol probability variation state flag store 00H respectively) ), the gaming state notification LED output number 00H is stored, the ceiling counter is set to an initial value, and the gaming state number YJ is updated to "00H (normal state)". The same applies to the case where the latent probability state is ended (when a limited latent probability large hit is provided). As a result, the ST100 mode (probably changed state) is ended, and the next game is shifted to the normal mode (general mode). In the ST100 mode, when the special symbol probability variation counter becomes zero, the special symbol time saving counter also becomes zero (when the ST number becomes zero in this game, the time saving also becomes zero. ), The special symbol time saving counter is executed when the time saving counter is set to "0" in the above "time saving end setting process (step S481)", and functions related to the time saving state such as the electric tuner support function are turned off. Because it is possible, in this process, turn off only the special symbol probability variation function, all functions related to the probability variation state (special symbol probability variation function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension) The function) may be set to OFF. Regarding the setting of the ceiling counter, the initial value (999 times) may be set in the above “setting process at the end of time saving (step S481)” or may be set in this process.

When the setting process at the time of the end of the probability variation of the above step S486 is finished, it is then determined whether or not the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S488). The determination process of the special symbol fluctuation number counter here is mainly monitoring of the switching pattern (update game) of the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) in the ST mode.

If the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S488: YES), the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation number counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special symbol variation number counter is decremented by 1 (step S489) as a digest of the variation number this time (step S489), and the special symbol variation number counter after the subtraction Is determined to be zero (step S490).

If the special symbol variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is not an update game of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), and nothing is done to exit this special symbol confirmation time process.

If the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is determined that the update game of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) has arrived, and the game state update processing is executed (step S491). Here, the update processing of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) in the ST mode is performed. The fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated when (α) ST early mode ends, (β) ST middle mode ends, or (γ) ST late mode ends. .. To be precise, the update processing according to the ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes is performed.

In the ST25 mode, when the ST early mode is completed, the mode is shifted to the time saving mode, so the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from ST early mode “02H” to time saving mode “05H”.

In the case of ST75 mode, since the ST early game mode ends, the mode shifts to the ST middle game mode (first update). At this time, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is changed from the ST early game mode “02H” to the ST middle game mode. Is updated to "03H". Then, when the ST middle stage mode ends, the mode shifts to the time saving mode (the second update). At this time, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "03H" in the ST middle stage mode to "05H" in the time saving mode. To do.

In the ST100 mode, when the ST early mode is completed, the mode shifts to the ST intermediate mode (first update). Therefore, as in the case of the ST75 mode described above, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is set to the ST early mode “02H”. From “ST” to “03H” in the ST middle mode. After that, when the ST middle stage mode ends, the ST final stage mode is entered (the second update). At this time, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is changed from "03H" in the ST middle stage mode to "04H" in the ST late stage mode. To update. Then, when the ST end stage mode ends, the ST end stage mode is entered (the third update). At this time, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is changed from "04H" in the ST end stage mode to "00H" in the general mode. Update.

The process of step S491 described above functions as a variation pattern mode updating unit that updates (changes) the selection condition of the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the establishment of the predetermined change condition.

Next, when the game state update process of step S491 is completed, next, the special figure variation counter update process is performed (step S492). Here, (1) after the ST number of times of ST early mode is digested 25 times, the process of setting the duration of the ST middle mode (ST number of 50 times) (the process of setting the value of the special symbol variation number counter 2) , (2) After the ST number of 50 times in the ST middle mode has been exhausted, a process of setting the duration of the ST end mode (25 times of the ST number) (process of setting the value of the special symbol variation number counter 3) is performed. (For the value of the special symbol variation number counter to be updated, refer to the special symbol variation number counter 1 to 3 buffer column of the game state transition table of FIG. 22). In the present embodiment, the ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST late stage modes are realized by the processing of steps S488 to S491.

Next, a precursor mode transition management process is executed (step S493). In the omen mode transition management process, the ceiling counter is checked to determine whether or not the value of the ceiling counter is the number of omen mode transition trigger games. In the case of the present embodiment, since the 990th game enters the omen mode (see FIG. 7), when the ceiling counter N indicates the 989th game in this game (ceiling counter N=10), the transition to the omen mode is performed. Perform the setting process. Specifically, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "00H" in the general mode to "01H" in the precursor mode. As a result, a transition is made from the 990th game of the next game to the predictive mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the predictive mode is selected, and the effect under the predictive effect mode is revealed.

When the precursor mode transition management process of the step S493 is finished, a game state information transmission process is then executed (step S495). This game state information transmission process transmits the game state designation command, like the game state information transmission process (step S408) during the special symbol variation start process shown in FIG. However, the game state designation command transmitted here is information relating to the game state at the end of the game, that is, information including the contents updated in steps S482, S491, S494 and the like. Therefore, by the game state designation command transmitted in the present process, the effect control unit 24 can grasp whether or not the game state is to be shifted, and can perform the effect mode shift control at the end of the current game. For example, even after the 989th game is over and the 990th game is not started, the day background of the general effect mode can be switched to the night background of the omen mode immediately after the 989th game is completed.

When the game state information transmission process of step S495 above is finished, the special symbol confirmation time process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited. Then, the process proceeds to the special electric auditors product management process (step S095) in FIG.

<23. Special electric accessory management process: Figure 17>
Next, the special electric auditors product management process (step S095) in FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric auditors product management process of step S095.

In FIG. 17, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hit medium flag (step S501). When the small hitting medium flag is in the ON state (step S501:=5AH), the small hitting process is performed (step S504), and the special electric auditors product management process is exited. In this small hitting process, necessary processes for controlling the small hitting game operation are executed.

When the above-mentioned small hitting flag is in the OFF state (step S501: ≠5AH), the state of the condition device operation flag is then determined (step S502). If the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (step S502: ≠5 AH), in this case, because it is not in the small hit game (step S501: ≠5 AH), it is not in the big hit game, so do nothing special, this special electric accessory Exit the management process.

When the condition device operation flag is in the ON state (step S502:=5AH), a process according to the special electric auditors product operating status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special electric auditors product status branching process). The "special electric auditors product operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variation winning device 52, and the status value is changed according to the processing state, and the special electric auditors product operation status storage area of the RAM in the area. Stored in. Special electric auditors product operation status, "start processing (00H)" that specifies that it is in the standby state before the big hit game start, "operation start processing ( 01H)", "operating (02H)" that specifies that a round game is being executed, and "continuing determination (03H)" that specifies that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. , "Big hit end processing in progress (04H)" which specifies that the end processing at the end of the big hit game is included.

In the special electric auditors product operation status branch process of step S503, the special electric auditors product operation status value is "starting process (00H)", "operation starting process (01H)", "operating (02H)", and "continuation determination ( 03H)” and “big hit end processing in progress (04H)”, any one of steps S505 to S509 is executed. These processes are processes for controlling execution of the big hit game, and through the processes of steps S505 to S509, a hit game corresponding to various hits is realized. The processing contents of steps S505 to S509 will be described below.

<Big hit game control processing (steps S505 to S509)>
(9-1. Big hit start processing)
The "big hit start process" in step S505 will be described. At the start of the big hit game, the special electric auditors product operation status is set to the initial value "start processing (00H)". Therefore, when the "big hit" occurs, the "big hit start process" is first executed.

When the big hit start process is entered, the CPU 201 first sets the accessory continuous operation device operation flag to the ON state as a setting process (setting process at the start) required when starting the big hit game. As a result, the continuous operation of the special electric accessory (round game) is allowed. Then, the special electric auditors product operation status is updated to "operation start processing (01H)", and 01H for designating the first 1R for the first time is set in the "continuous number counter" for counting the number of rounds. Then, according to the hit type (special symbol determination data) that was won this time, in the corresponding area of the RAM in the area, the "maximum number of rounds" corresponding to the big hit this time, and the "start interval time" in the special symbol auditors product operation timer To set. The "start interval time (start INT)" means that after the confirmation display time of the special symbol has passed (see step S471 of FIG. 16A) and the jackpot has been confirmed, the special variation winning device 52 operates (the 1st round It is an interval section of (until the game is started), and indicates the time width that defines the opening effect section.

Next, the "big hit start command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the big hit start process is exited. Note that the "big hit start command" includes information that can specify the type of big hit this time and the game state at the time of winning the big hit, in addition to the role of instructing the start of the opening effect, and the big hit game in the effect control unit 24. It is also used when determining a series of winning effects to be developed inside (such as an opening effect corresponding to each type of big hit, an effect during the round, an effect at the end of the round, and an ending effect). Thus, the big hit game is started.

(9-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing)
Next, the “special electric auditors product operation start processing” in step S506 will be described.

When entering the special electric auditors product operation start processing, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol auditors product operation timer is zero. In the special symbol auditors product operation timer here, the interval time before the start of the round is set. As this interval time, in the first round (1R), the "start interval time (start INT)" set in the "big hit start process (step S505)" is monitored, but this process is performed in the 2R or later. When passing through (step S506), the "interval time before opening", specifically, the interval time between rounds (INT between Rs) between the end of this round game and the start of the next round game To be monitored. Until this special symbol auditors product operation timer becomes zero, since this round game has not ended, the special electric auditors accessory operation start processing is ended without doing anything.

On the other hand, the special symbol auditors product operation timer is zero, that is, if the interval time before opening (in the case of 1R, the start interval time) has elapsed, the jackpot type (special symbol determination data) and the current round number (continuous number counter) Value) and the opening/closing operation pattern of the special winning opening 50 are set (special winning opening opening/closing operation setting processing). Here, the special winning opening opening and closing operation time (maximum opening time) is stored in the special symbol auditors product operation timer, and solenoid control data for controlling the special winning opening solenoid 52c (large executed corresponding to the number of rounds Set the data for winning and opening/closing operation pattern.

In addition, a special winning opening opening command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 along with the special winning opening opening operation. The "special winning opening opening command" includes current round number information, and is used by the effect control unit 24 when the in-round effect corresponding to the number of rounds is displayed. Then, the special electric auditors product operation status is switched to "in operation (02H)", and the special electric auditors product management process is exited. Thereby, the special winning opening 50 is opened with the special winning opening opening/closing time as an upper limit, and the round game of this time is started.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory)
Next, the “special electric auditors product operating process” in step S507 will be described.

When entering the special electric auditors operating process, the CPU 201 first monitors whether or not the number of winning balls to the special winning opening 50 has reached the maximum winning number, and if the maximum winning number has been reached, the special symbol combination Clear the physical operation timer to zero. As a result, the timer value set in the "special electric auditors product operation start process (step S506)" is forcibly set to zero, and the maximum winning number is reached. Will be closed. In addition, here, every time there is a winning in the special winning opening 50, a "big winning opening winning command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The special winning opening winning command includes the information on the occurrence of winnings in the special winning opening and the information on the number of prize balls (which may include the setting value information), and notifies the player that the special winning opening 50 has been won. In addition to being used for the effect, it is also used for the appearance control of the setting suggestion effect using the winning effect. For example, when there are over-winning prizes exceeding the maximum number of winnings, a special over-winning win effect is displayed instead of the normal over-winning win effect according to the appearance rate determined according to the set value.

In addition, until the special symbol auditors product operation timer becomes zero, that is, until the special winning opening opening operation time (maximum opening time) elapses or until the maximum winning number is reached, do nothing, As it is, the special electric auditors work is exited.

If the maximum winning number is reached or the maximum opening time elapses and the special symbol auditors product operation timer becomes zero, it is determined that this round game has ended, and the special electric auditors operation status is set to "Continue judgment. (03H)”, and the remaining symbol discharge time (1980 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. The "remaining ball discharge time" refers to a margin time for discharging the remaining balls inside the special winning opening after the special winning opening is closed. Further, with the closing of the special winning opening (end of the round game), an interval command between rounds is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This "inter-round interval command" includes round game end information and current round number information, and in the effect control unit 24, the effect (inter-interval interval effect) in the inter-round interval (R inter-INT) until the next round. It is used when making it appear. As described above, the processing during the operation of the special electric auditors product is completed.

(9-4. Special electric accessory operation continuation determination process)
Next, the “special electric auditors product operation continuation determination processing” in step S508 will be described.

When entering the special electric auditors product operation continuation determination process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol auditors product operation timer is zero. Because the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) after closing the special winning opening is set in the special symbol auditors product operation timer here (see step S507), it is determined whether or not this remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. To be done. Until the special symbol auditors product operation timer becomes zero, the special electric auditors product operation continuation determination processing is ended without doing anything.

If the special symbol auditors product operation timer becomes zero (remaining ball discharge time elapses), the value of the continuous number counter is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the current round number has reached the maximum round number. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, as the processing during the round game continuation, the continuous number counter is incremented by 1 (+1), the "pre-release interval time" is stored in the special symbol auditors product operation timer, and the special electric role The object operation status is switched to "operation start processing (01H)".

On the other hand, when the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, as the setting process at the end of the final round, "end interval time (end INT)" is stored in the special symbol auditors product operation timer, and the special electric auditors product The operation status is switched to "end processing (04H)". The "end interval time" is an interval section from the end of the round game of the final round to the end of the remaining ball discharge time until the jackpot game ends, and refers to the time width that defines the ending effect section. ..

Then, a "big hit end command" for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the special electric auditors product operation continuation determination processing is exited. As a result, the round game for the maximum number of rounds is completed. The jackpot end command includes information about the type of jackpot this time and the gaming state at the time of winning, that is, information that can specify the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished. It is also used when determining the staging mode.

(9-5. Big hit end processing: FIG. 18)
Next, the “big hit ending process” in step S509 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit ending process.

In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol auditors product operation timer is zero (step S591). Since the above-mentioned end interval time (end INT) is set in the special symbol auditors product operation timer here, it is determined here whether or not this end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol auditors product operation timer becomes zero (step S591: NO), the jackpot ending process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol auditors product operation timer becomes zero (end interval time elapses) (step S591: YES), the state flag setting process is executed (step S592). Here, each value of the state buffer set in the "game state transition preparation process (step S412 of FIG. 12)" described above is set in the flag area or counter corresponding to the state buffer. Thereby, the game state after the big hit game is designated.

Next, various setting processes at the end of the big hit are executed (step S593). Here, various data used during the big hit game control process (for example, flags and counter values used in steps S505 to S509) are cleared, the gaming state notification LED output number is updated, and the special electric auditors operation status is set. Switch to "starting processing (00H)".

When the big hit ending process is finished, a series of control processes relating to the big hit game are ended, and the big hit game of this time is ended. It should be noted that the series of control processes relating to the big hit game described above are the same when "forced hit" is given by the ceiling privilege.

<19. Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 19 to 20>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 20, the effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described. The process on the side of the effect control unit 24 is mainly a predetermined main process (main process on the effect control side: FIG. 19) and a timer interrupt process activated by a timed interrupt from the CTC (timer interrupt process on the effect control side: FIG. 20) is mainly configured.

<19. Production control side main processing: FIG. 19>
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a main process (effect control side main process) on the effect control unit side. The effect control unit 24 starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG. 19 when the power is externally turned on to the game machine body.

In the main process on the effect control side, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first performs a necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation (step S1001). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, movable body part starting point returning processing, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of register values inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

When the initial setting process is completed, the main loop process of steps S1003 to S1011 is performed at predetermined time intervals (16 ms) as a process during normal operation, and otherwise, the effect soft random number updating process of step S01012 is repeatedly performed.

In the process of step S1002, the CPU 241 refers to the main loop update counter, and determines whether or not the main loop update cycle (counter value>15) that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S1002). The main loop update counter is a counter that is incremented during the later-described production control timer interrupt processing that is executed every 1 ms (see step S1057 in FIG. 20). In the present embodiment, the main loop process is performed every 16 ms, and the main loop update counter value is determined in the determination process of step S1002, and if the value is greater than "15" (step S1002: YES), assuming that the execution timing of the main loop processing has arrived, the processing of steps S1003 to S1011 is executed, and in other cases, until the main loop update cycle arrives (step S1002: NO), various effects The random number for lottery is updated (step S1012).

When the main loop update period has arrived (step S1002: YES), the main loop update counter is cleared to zero (step S1003), and then error processing is executed (step S1004). Here, setting of a production scenario for error notification during an error, error cancellation processing when the error is canceled, and the like are executed. It should be noted that errors relating to the rendering means (movable body accessory error, voice IC error, etc.) are monitored here.

Next, a demo/power saving mode process is executed (step S1005). In this demo/power saving mode processing, setting processing required for the demonstration start waiting effect, the customer waiting effect, and the power saving mode is executed.

Next, effect switch input processing is executed (step S1007). In this effect switch input processing, the operation state of the operation means (effect button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, effect control processing according to the operation is executed. The input state of the operating means is monitored by the button input state update process (step S1052) in FIG. 20 described later.

Next, command analysis processing is performed (step S1008). In this command analysis processing, it is monitored whether or not a production control command is stored in the command receiving buffer, and if the production control command is stored, this command is read and the production processing corresponding to the read production control command is executed. To do. When an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control unit 20 side occurs, a command reception interrupt process (not shown) is executed. Through this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is acquired, and the data thereof is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243.

For example, when at least a variation pattern designation command is received and stored in the reception buffer (in the present embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative pattern designation command are received and stored in the reception buffer). In the case), in the command analysis process, one or a plurality of types of effect patterns are determined based on the information (variation pattern information and winning information (or winning type information)) included in the command. The effect pattern determined here works as a "part effect" as an element constituting an effect scenario. Next, a time schedule is determined for at what timing and for what effect time width the above-determined effect pattern (part effect) is to appear, and thereby an effect scenario is configured, Data of the rendering scenario is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. Various production patterns (parts productions) incorporated in this production scenario are successively or simultaneously developed to realize a "production scenario" in a broad sense.

Further, for example, when the "hold addition command" is received, a rendering process for displaying a pre-reading notice (holding change notice and/or changing pre-reading notice), a ceiling hold change notice (FIG. 32), and the like. To do.

When the command analysis process is completed, the scenario update process is subsequently executed (step S1009). In this scenario update processing, the content of the timer required for execution of the production scenario is updated, and processing for advancing the production scenario based on the timer value is executed. A representative example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule regarding the occurrence timing of effects. For example, within the fluctuation period (special symbol fluctuation period) in which the special symbol is variably displayed, within the fluctuation period (decorative symbol fluctuation period) in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed, that time This timer manages a temporal schedule of what kind of effect pattern, how much time width, and what kind of effect means to appear on the axis. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in an LED drive data update process (step S1011) and an effect character action update process (step S1053) described later. Here, the effect scenario timer is monitored, and when the time of occurrence of one effect arrives, sound data for the speaker 46 and a liquid crystal command for image display control are created, and each is stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. .. The LED data for the optical display device is created by the LED drive data update processing (step S1011) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created by the performance effect operation update process (step S1053) described later. It

Next, sound output processing is performed (step S1010). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process of step S1009 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, based on the sound data set for each sound channel, a phrase, volume, etc. The data is output to the sound control unit (sound source LSI), and the sound effect is displayed from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit. As a result, sound production in accordance with the production scenario is realized.

Next, the LED drive data update process is executed (step S1011). In this LED drive data update processing, LED data for an optical display device such as the decorative lamp 13 and various effect LEDs is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and the decorative lamp section 45 and the decorative lamp section 45 are generated through the optical display control section. Turn on and off the LED. As a result, the light effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

As described above, when the main loop processing is completed, the effect software random number update processing in step S1012 is performed until the next main loop update cycle arrives.

<31. Production control timer interrupt processing: Figure 20>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the timer interrupt process on the effect control side will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the effect control side timer interrupt processing. This effect control side timer interrupt processing is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (1 ms), and is interrupted and executed during execution of the effect control side main processing.

In FIG. 20, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the register contents in the stack area (step S1051), and then executes the button input state update processing (step S1052). In this button input state update processing, the input state of the operation detection signal from the operation means (effect button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in RAM 243. Store in area. This operation detection information is used when displaying the information relating to the player participation type effect, the menu screen, the menu item, and the like in the scenario update process (step S1009) in FIG. In the present embodiment, it is possible to detect once pressing, long pressing, repeated hits, and the like.

Next, a performance accessory operation update process is executed (step S1053). In this performance effect operation updating process, a process of creating motor control data for a movable role product is performed based on the performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer.

Next, SOL/MOT output processing is performed (step S1054). In this SOL/MOT output processing, the control data for the movable body accessory product created in the above-described production accessory operation update processing is output to the drive control unit. The drive control unit outputs a control signal based on the control data to the movable body accessory motor of the movable body accessory to be operated, and controls the operation. As a result, a movable body effect is realized by the movable body accessory (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90, etc.) according to the effect scenario.

Next, liquid crystal command transmission processing is performed (step S1055). In this liquid crystal command transmission processing, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update processing (step S1009) of FIG. 19, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU), and the image for the liquid crystal display device 36 is displayed. Display control is executed. As a result, an image effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

Then, the RTC information acquisition process is executed (step S1056). In this RTC information acquisition processing, date and time information (RTC information) clocked by RTC is acquired. This RTC information is used when an effect based on the RTC information is displayed.

Next, the main loop update counter is incremented (step S1057). The main loop update counter is reset in step S1003 during the main process on the effect control side and incremented in this process. Therefore, when step S1057 is executed, the main loop update counter value is any of 0 to 15.

When the process of step S1057 is finished, the saved contents of the register are restored (step S1058), the timer interrupt process is finished, and the main process on the effect control side is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

[Modification Example 1 of Benefit Form] FIG. 33
In the above embodiment, the configuration in which the ceiling privilege is given when the predetermined number of games are executed without winning the big hit in the normal mode (at least during the normal state of the internal game state) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be, for example, the following form (α) to form (ζ).

<Assignment form (α): FIG. 33(a)>
(Α) Regardless of the game mode or the internal game state, the number of executed games is counted, and the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 1000th game) without winning the jackpot. The ceiling privilege is given to the user (see FIG. 33(A)). In the case of this configuration, the number of games executed not only in the normal mode (normal state) but also in the time saving mode (time saving state) and the probability variation mode (probability variation state) is counted. Therefore, it is possible to give the ceiling privilege purely according to how many games are addicted to this big hit.

<Assignment form (β): FIG. 33 (b)>
(Β) Counting the number of games in the “gaming state with low probability state (low probability gaming state)”, without winning the jackpot, the counted number of games is a predetermined number of games (for example, the 1000th game). ) Is reached, the ceiling privilege is granted. In the case of this example, the number of games executed during the gaming state (high-probability gaming state) involving the high probability state is excluded from the counting target. Here, "a gaming state with a low probability state" corresponds to "normal state" or "time saving state" when paying attention to the internal gaming state, and "normal mode" or "time saving state" when paying attention to the game mode. "Mode" is applicable.

FIG. 33B shows, as a typical example, a time saving big hit 1 (transition destination game state is time saving A), a probability variation big hit 3 (transition destination gaming state is ST25 mode (probability variation C)), and a probability variation big hit 2 (transition destination game). The state shows the case where the ST75 mode (probability variation B)) and the probability variation jackpot 1 (the transition destination game state is the ST100 mode (probability variation A)) are applied to the present example (assignment mode (β)). In the figure, for the sake of easy comparison between the three parties, "big hits that give 100 power support times" are shown. For each jackpot, the number of games required from the end of power support (101st game) to the ceiling game (1000th game) (referred to as “required game number X” in this example) is as follows.

Referring to FIG. 33B, in the case of a short-time A big hit, the game is shifted to a time-saving state of 100 times of the time-saving after the big hit game is finished, and 100 times of the time-saving is counted. Therefore, the required number of games X is “900 games” (see “Time saving A” in FIG. 33B).
On the other hand, when the ST mode transition trigger is a big hit, the number of games from the end of electric support until the ceiling is reached varies depending on the ST mode. Specifically, referring to “ST25”, “ST75”, and “ST100” in FIG.
In the ST25 mode (25 ST times + 75 hour reductions), the required number of games X is "925 games" because 75 hour reductions after ST25 times are counted.
In the ST75 mode (75 ST times + 25 hour reductions), the required number X of games is "975 games" because 25 hour reductions after ST75 times are counted.
In the ST100 mode (100 ST times), the ST mode is in progress for 100 games until the end of power support, and thus the 100 games are excluded from the counting target. Therefore, the required number of games X is 1000 games. In the ST mode, the ST game with a relatively low profit degree requires a smaller number of games from the end of electric support to the number of ceiling games.

To summarize the relationship shown in the figure, regarding the "required number of games X", the relationship is "time saving A (100 times saving time)<ST25 mode<ST75 mode<ST100 mode". That is, the more the game mode (internal game state) in which the degree of profit is relatively low is shifted, the more the required number of games (the required number of games in the normal mode (normal state)) from the end of electric support to the ceiling is reached. It has a unique relationship of decreasing. This "reducing the number of required games to be executed in the normal mode (normal state)" can be said to be a relief function having a character different from the ceiling privilege.

<Applying form (γ): FIG. 33 (C)>
(Γ) The number of games in a specific variation pattern selection mode (specific Tcode) is counted, and the ceiling privilege is given when the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games without winning the jackpot. In order to facilitate understanding of this example, as a virtual game machine, as a game mode corresponding to the normal mode, two games, a "normal A mode" and a "normal B mode", which have different variation pattern selection modes, are used. An explanation will be given taking a gaming machine capable of controlling a plurality of types of gaming machine modes including modes as an example. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33C, for example, the count target is the number of executed games in the “normal B mode”. In this case, since the running game in the "normal A mode" is not counted, the ceiling privilege is not given regardless of how many games are run in the normal A mode, but it is executed in the "normal B mode". It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the ceiling privilege is awarded when the number of games reached a predetermined number. The transition conditions for the "normal A mode" and the "normal B mode" (transition conditions for the variation pattern selection mode) include, for example, "make mode transition when a small win is won" or "number of running games ( Depending on the number of fluctuations), a mode transition is caused." By using this example, it is possible to create a gaming property as described in (A) or (B) below.

[(A) Case of causing shift of variation pattern selection mode due to small win]
A case will be described in which the shift of the variation pattern selection mode is caused due to the small win. As an example of this case, for example, when a small hit (probability of winning 1/50) is provided on the special map 1 side and a small hit (promotion lottery) is won during "normal A mode" with regard to transition of the variation pattern selection mode. To "normal B" (it shifts to the normal B mode after a small hit game), and if you win the small hit again during the "normal B mode" (falling lottery), the "normal A mode" Shift (shift to normal A mode after small hit game). Regarding the ceiling benefit grant, when a predetermined number of games (for example, 70 games) are addicted without winning a small hit or a big hit in the “normal B mode” (70 games are continuously lost in the normal B mode). Case) Ceiling privilege is granted. In the case of this case, the ceiling privilege is not awarded regardless of how much the user is addicted to the normal A mode, but the ceiling privilege is granted when 70 games are addicted to the normal B mode. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel game property in which the normal B mode is made to function as a “ceiling privilege giving opportunity period” that is advantageous to the player, that is, a “chance zone”. A plurality of small hits may be provided. For example, when the first small hit is won in the normal A mode, the mode is shifted to the normal B mode, and the second small hit is won in the normal B mode. You may switch to the mode. In this case, the first small hit and the second small hit may have different winning probabilities or the same winning probability. In addition, it is possible to determine the winning probability of a small hit depending on the set value. For example, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the first small hit (small hit that becomes a trigger to shift to the normal B mode (chance zone)), and the second small hit (shift trigger to the normal A mode). If the winning probability of "small win" is set low, the higher the setting, the lower the probability of falling from the normal B mode. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of granting the ceiling benefit, and thus it is possible to create a gaming feature. The winning probability of the small hit, the variation pattern selection mode to be counted, and the number of games to which the ceiling privilege is given can be appropriately determined in consideration of playability.

[B: Case of causing transition to the variation pattern selection mode due to the number of variations]
Next, a case will be described in which the transition of the variation pattern selection mode occurs due to the number of variations. As an example of this case, for example, regarding the transition of the variation pattern selection mode, when the first number of games (for example, 50 games) are executed in the normal A mode, the transition to the “normal B mode” is performed, and the “normal B mode” is set. When the second number of games (for example, 40 games) is executed in the middle, the mode is shifted to the "normal A mode". Then, when the number of games in the normal B mode reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 400 games), the ceiling privilege is awarded. In this example, when the normal B mode is changed ten times, the ceiling reaching game number of 400 games can be reached. The number of games reaching the ceiling is not fixed, but a plurality of types of games such as 400 games, 600 games, and 800 games are provided, and one of the games can be determined by lottery. May be. In this case, the number of games that reach the ceiling is randomized, and the fun of the game can be improved. In addition, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of games (400 games), and the lower the set value the easier to select a relatively large number of games (800 games). If the lottery probability is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier the benefit of the ceiling privilege can be given. Conversely, the lower the setting, the easier the benefit of the ceiling privilege can be given. Further, it is possible to give the player a setting estimation element depending on the difference in the number of games reaching the ceiling.

Further, instead of counting the number of games in the specific variation pattern selection mode as the counting target, the “number of transitions to the specific variation pattern selection mode” may be the counting target. In this case, the ceiling privilege can be granted when the number of transitions to the specific variation pattern selection mode (normal B mode in this example) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). Further, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of the number of times of transition (for example, 7 times, 8 times, 9 times, 10 times, etc.) and determine any number of times of transition by lottery (transition number lottery). In this case, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively smaller number of transitions (for example, 7 times), and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively larger number of transitions (for example, 10 times). If the lottery probability of the number of transitions is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier the benefit of the ceiling privilege can be given, and conversely, the lower the setting, the easier the benefit of the ceiling privilege can be given. Further, it is possible to give the player a setting estimation element depending on the difference in the number of games reaching the ceiling.

<Applying form (δ)>
Also, instead of counting the number of executions of the special symbol variable display game (the number of variations of the special symbol), (δ) "the number of executions of the general symbol variable display game (number of variations of the general symbol)" is counted Good. In this case, it is preferable to count the "number of times of fluctuation of the normal symbol" during the gaming state accompanied by the low probability state (normal state and/or time saving state). For example, when the number of executions of the universal figure variation display game in the normal mode (normal state) is counted and a predetermined number of games (for example, the 2000th game) is reached, the ceiling privilege can be given.

<Applying form (ε)>
The (ε) condition device does not operate, the number of winnings of “small hit” is counted, and the ceiling privilege can be awarded when the number of winnings of the “small hit” reaches a predetermined number without winning the big hit. For example, the winning probability of the small hit is set to 1/100, and the ceiling privilege is awarded when the winning of the small hit reaches 10 times. It should be noted that instead of the number of winnings of "small hit", the number of operations of the special electric auditors product (the number of executions of small hit games) when the small hit is won may be counted. Further, a plurality of types of winning numbers may be provided (for example, 7, 8, 9 and 10 times), and any number may be determined by lottery (ceiling transition winning number lottery). In this case, the higher the set value is, the easier it is to select a relatively smaller number of winnings (for example, 7 times), and the lower the set value is, the easier it is to select a relatively larger number of winnings (for example, 10 times). If the lottery probability of each number of wins is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier the benefit of the ceiling privilege can be given. Conversely, the lower the setting, the easier the benefit of the ceiling privilege can be given. Further, it is possible to give the player a setting estimation element depending on the difference in the number of games reaching the ceiling (the same is true for the "assignment form ζ" described below).

<Applying form (ζ)>
In addition, the number of winnings of (ζ) “auxiliary winning” is counted, and when the predetermined number of winnings is reached, the ceiling privilege can be awarded. In this case, it is preferable to count the number of winnings in the gaming state (normal state and/or latent probability state) with at least the probability of lottery per auxiliary being low probability state (normal symbol probability changing function non-operation). In addition, instead of the number of winnings of "auxiliary winning", the number of executions of the ordinary electric open game may be counted.

The above-described granting forms (ε) and (ζ) are characterized in that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege does not depend on the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed (the number of times the symbol varies).

In the above embodiment, the granting form (α) and the granting form (β), it has been described that the ceiling privilege is granted when the predetermined number of games (the number of ceiling games) is reached, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of ceiling games may be determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling game number lottery) as in the above-mentioned grant form (γ). Specifically, a plurality of types of ceiling games can be provided (for example, 500 games, 700 games, and 1000 games), and any ceiling game number can be determined by lottery. Also in this case, the higher the setting value is, the easier it is to select a relatively smaller number of games, and the lower the setting value is, the more easily a relatively large number of games are selected. Can be determined by.

[Modification 2 of privilege grant form (divided privilege grant form): FIG. 34]
In the above-described embodiment and the modified example 1 of the privilege granting form, the form in which the ceiling activation trigger is once (the ceiling benefit is granted in the 1000th game) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of times (at least two times) of triggering a privilege (a trigger for granting a small privilege) can be set, and a small privilege granted by each trigger of a privilege can grant a large privilege (for example, a profit equivalent to a ceiling privilege). It can be configured (divided privilege giving form). This modified example 2 is more specific than the purpose of "giving a privilege to rescue a player from a big hamari" in that a plurality of privilege triggers are used, and a specific game state (for example, a normal state ( The purpose of "base up in normal mode))" is strong.

As a representative example of the second modification, for example, a configuration is adopted in which an upper limit is set for the number of time reductions to be given between the big hits, and the number of time reductions of the upper limit is divided into a plurality of times. Specifically, a configuration in which a "large privilege (corresponding to a ceiling privilege)", which is a finite time saving of 100 times of time saving, is divided into 4 times (divided grant) by a "small privilege" of finite time saving, which is 25 times of saving time. Is. Therefore, this modified example satisfies the following relational expression (10).

The upper limit of the number of shortening times to be given (hereinafter referred to as the "maximum number of shortening times") is X times, the number of times of giving is Y times, and the number of times of dividing the maximum number of shortening times (hereinafter referred to as the "shortening number of dividing times") is Zk times (k= 1 to Y: hereinafter, may be simply expressed as “Z”),
“ΣZk=X k=1 to Y”...Equation (10)
Meet For example, when the upper limit time saving number X is 100 and the division giving number Y is 4, the total number of division time saving times (Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4) in the case of giving 4 times until the next big hit is won is 100 times the upper limit time reducing number. The time saving state is given so that the number of times becomes (Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4=100). Note that the divided short-time numbers Zk may be the same or substantially the same divided short-time numbers or at least one different divided short-time number. That is, the small privilege with the same or substantially the same profit may be divided and given, or the different small privilege may be divided and given. As an example of the former, for example, 25 times of shortening time is divided into 4 times and is given to be 100 times of upper limit saving times (the same number of times of dividing short time is given), and as an example of the latter, for example, the first to fourth times. The number of division time reductions is set to "20 times, 20 times, 20 times, and 40 times" (partially different division time reduction times) and "15 times, 35 times, 20 times, and 30 times" (different division time reductions, respectively). Number of times). In addition, as the number of the summary games is relatively large, a small privilege having a relatively high profit degree may be provided. For example, the number of times of division time reduction from the first time to the fourth time can be set to “10 times, 20 times, 30 times and 40 times”.

The upper limit shortened number of times X, the number of times of giving Y, and the divided number of shortened times Z can be set to appropriate values in consideration of playability and the like. For example, the upper limit time saving number X can be set to the number of times (for example, 300 times) satisfying the relationship of “upper limit time saving number X>maximum time saving number due to big hit”. However, in order not to give an excessive privilege, the upper limit saving time X is at least “upper limit saving time X≦maximum saving time by big hit (100 times)” or “minimum saving time by big hit (50 times)≦upper limit It is preferable to have a relationship that satisfies the “time saving number X<maximum time saving number due to big hit (100 times)”.

Further, there may be a plurality of privilege triggers (number of grants Y), and for example, “what game should be given or how many games should be given regardless of the game state”, “specific game”. It is also possible to appropriately determine "what game of the state should be given," "how many games should be given in a specific game state", and the like.

Further, after the time saving number (large privilege) for the upper limit time saving number is given, no further time saving state is given and the benefit is not given until the next big hit. After finishing the giving of the large privilege, the sufficient privilege is given, in other words, the relief function is fulfilled, and thereafter, the privilege is not given until the next big hit. However, the ceiling privilege (FIGS. 7 and 23) may be separately provided. For example, when the predetermined number of games is addicted to 1000 games without winning the next big hit after the division privilege is given, the ceiling privilege can be given. Further, the setting suggestion effect can be configured to appear in at least one of the plurality of privilege activation triggers. In this case, it is possible to obtain the setting suggestion information in addition to the benefit grant when the privilege triggering game (privilege grant game) arrives, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, here, the configuration in which a finite time reduction is given as a great benefit has been described, but it is needless to say that the present invention can be applied to finite probability variation or finite latent probability. In this case, if the "time saving number" is read as "ST number" and the "time saving state" is read as "probability variation state" or "latent probability state" as appropriate, a finite probability variation (large benefit) is dividedly assigned (small benefit It is obvious that the concept of the configuration is such that a finite probability variation is given multiple times or a finite latent probability (large privilege) is dividedly given (a small bonus finite latent probability is given multiple times). For example, the upper limit shortened number of times X may be appropriately read as “upper limit ST number of times X”, and the divided shorter number of times Z may be appropriately read as “divided ST number of times”. As an example, in the above formula (10), the upper limit of the number of STs to be given (upper limit ST number) is X times, the number of grants is Y times, and the number of times the upper limit ST number is divided (divided ST number) is Zk times. When (k=1 to Y), it can be read as “ΣZk=X k=1 to Y” is satisfied.

(Specific example of modified example 2: FIG. 34)
This modified example (modified example 2) is roughly classified into a "periodic granting form" in which a privilege is periodically (periodically) given, such as "a small privilege is given every time a predetermined number of games are executed". ", and "aperiodic addition form" in which division is not added periodically. First, the periodical application form will be described with reference to FIG.

[Periodic giving form]
<A. Concrete Example 1 of Periodic Application Form (Applying Form (κ)): FIG. 34(a)>
FIG. 34(a) shows an example of the cyclically added form (added form (κ)). FIG. 34(a) shows that the symbol variable display game is executed every predetermined number of games (here, 100 games) during the normal state (normal mode) after the electric power support by the big hit is finished (p0 in the figure) ( (P1, p3, p5, p7 in the figure), and a small privilege "a finite time saving of 25 times (shortening times 25 times for dividing)" is given. Here, the number of grants is set to 4 and a total of 4 small benefits are granted, thus completing the grant of the large benefit "100 hours/hours finite time limit (upper limit hour/hours 100 times time saving state)". It shows the case.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 34A, during the 100th game from the 1st to the 100th game (p1) after the end of power support (p0), the normal state is controlled (division-free period), and the 101st game. The first time the privilege is activated (privilege grant opportunity), a limited time of a small privilege (25 times of time saving) is granted, and the 25 games from 101st to 125th games (p2) are controlled to be in the time saving state. (Controlled in a time-saving state by the first small privilege).
Next, during the 100th game from the 126th to 225th games (p3), the normal state is controlled again (the period without division), and the second privilege activation timing arrives at the 226th game, and the limited time of the small privilege ( The time saving frequency is 25 times), and the 25 games from the 226th game to the 250th game (p4) are controlled to the time saving state (the time is controlled to the time saving state by the second small privilege).
Next, during the 100 games up to the 251-350th game (p5), the normal state is again controlled (the period without division), and the third privilege activation timing arrives at the 351st game, and the limited time of the small privilege ( (Time saving number 25 times) is given, and the game is controlled to the time saving state until the 351-375th game (p6) (control to the time saving state by the third small privilege).
Then, the game is controlled to the normal state again from the 376th to the 475th game (p7), and the last time (4th time) of activating the privilege comes to the 476th game, and the limited time of the small privilege (25 times of saving time) It is granted and is controlled to a time-saving state from the 476th to the 500th game (p8) (controlled to a time-saving state by the fourth small privilege), and as a result, the grant of the large benefit "100 hours of finite time saving" is completed. To do. In other words, the small privilege (25 times per hour) is divided into 4 parts and given cyclically (every 100 games), and if the game is addicted to 500 games after the end of the electric support, all of the maximum 100 times per hour will be granted. Become. In other words, such a granting form is equivalent to granting a maximum of 4 sets with one game period of "100 running games in normal state + 25 time saving" as a set, and the limiter function is provided. It can also be said to be a privilege-giving function provided. Although illustration of the effect mode is omitted, as in the above-described embodiment (FIGS. 6 and 7), if it is a normal state (normal mode), the normal effect mode is set, and if it is a time saving state (time saving mode). For example, it may be configured such that the control can be shifted to the effect mode according to the game state, such as the time saving effect mode (air battle mode).

(When granting infinite benefits)
In the above example, the configuration is described in which the limited time period is divided and given as a great benefit, but the upper limit number of times reduced is infinite, that is, the “infinite time period” may be divided and given. When the large benefit is “infinite time reduction”, for example, a predetermined divided time reduction number (small benefit) may be permanently given to every 100 games until the next big hit is won. Further, as in the case of FIG. 34(a), the divided short time count is given 25 times for every 100 games, but an infinite number of divided short time count may be given to the 476th game (p7 of the final grant). In this case, the time saving state can be continued even after the 501st game. Of course, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the upper limit ST number is infinite and the infinite probability variation and the infinite latent probability are divided and added. In this case, as described above, the “time saving number” may be appropriately read as the “ST number”, and the “time saving state” may be appropriately read as the “probably changed state” or the “latent probability state”.

<B. Specific Example 2 of Periodic Application Form (Applying Form (κ)): FIG. 34B>
In the above-mentioned grant form (κ), the cyclic grant form of “dividing and granting the ceiling privilege” has been described. Next, as other cyclical granting modes, the profit status granted by winning the jackpot is “infinite time reduction”, “finite time reduction”, “infinite probability variation”, “finite probability variation”, “infinite latent probability”, or “finite time variation”. A configuration (granting form (λ)) in which "intelligence" or the like is divided and imparted by a plurality of privilege activation triggers will be described.

In this example, profits such as time-saving state (infinite time reduction, finite time reduction), probability variation state (infinite probability variation, finite probability variation), latent probability state (infinite latent probability, finite latent probability), etc., given by winning the jackpot, are obtained multiple times. This is a structure in which division is given according to the triggering of the privilege. In other words, as in the above-described embodiment (see FIGS. 4, 6 to 7, etc.), instead of immediately giving all the short working times and all the ST times after the big hit game, they are given in small amounts over a long game period. It is a configuration that goes. In this example, in the case of a short-time big hit, the number of times saved by the big hit corresponds to the "upper limit time saved" (large benefit), and the number of times saved divided is equivalent to the "divided time saved" (small benefit). To do. Further, in the case of the probability variation big hit or the latent probability big hit, the number of STs given by the big hit corresponds to the “upper limit ST number” (large privilege), and the number of STs dividedly given is the “divided ST number” (small privilege) Equivalent to. A specific example thereof is shown in FIG.

FIG. 34B shows, as a typical example of the present example (form of impartation (λ)), a time-saving big hit α to γ (a time-saving 50 times a finite time-short hit, a time-saving count 100 times a finite time-short hit, Infinite time/win/win) is shown as an example. FIG. (A) shows a case of normal granting without dividing the time saving number when the time saving big hit (equivalent to time saving big hit 2 in FIG. 4) of 50 times saving time is won, and FIG. When you win a 100-hour saving/short-time jackpot (equivalent to 1 in the saving-hours/hours list in Fig. 4), you can divide the 100 100-hour saving-hours into two divisions. FIG. 6C shows a case in which division is given, and FIG. 6C shows the case where when the player wins the time saving/hits jackpot that gives an infinite number of times (including the number of times that becomes substantially infinite), the time saving number is given 50 times and the second time is given. It shows the case of giving an infinite number of times to.

As shown in FIGS. 34A to 34C, with reference to FIG. 34B, when any one of the time saving/hits jackpots α to γ is won, the number of times of saving and shortening is the first regardless of which jackpot is won. Fifty times is given, and then different game transitions are followed according to the type of jackpot that was won. Here, as shown in the figure, when it is determined that the effect modes are made common, the following gaming characteristics can be created.

(Time-saving concealment game)
When the time saving big hits α to γ are won, the big hit type won in the effect (preliminary effect including the decoration stop design, etc.) and the hit effect in the symbol variable display game is set to the secret state. The production mode after the big hit game is also a common time-saving production mode (air battle mode: see FIG. 29 to FIG. 31) up to the first time saving time of 50 times (between 1 and 50 games) (section a0 to p0 in the figure). ), and the subsequent 51st game to the 150th game is a common normal effect mode (for example, general effect mode) (section of p0 to p1 in the figure). Accordingly, until the 150th game has passed, the jackpot type that has been won is hidden from the production, and during this time, the player enjoys the game while expecting to win the hour/hour jackpot β or the hour/hour jackpot γ. Here, when the big hit that was won this time is the short-time big-hit α, the normal production mode is continued even after the 151st game (p1 and after), so the big hit that was won this time was the short-time big-hit α. It will be revealed. However, in the case where the winning big hit is the time saving big hit β or the time saving big hit γ, the time saving condition occurs in the 151st game and the mode is shifted to the time saving effect mode again. Therefore, at this stage, the time saving big hit β or the time saving big hit. It is a secret state which of γ is won. Therefore, the player enjoys the game while hoping that the time saving state will not end in 200 games (p2 in the figure) (while expecting to win the time saving jackpot γ). Then, if the time-saving state continues after the 201st game, it is confirmed that the jackpot won is a time-saving jackpot γ, that is, an infinite time-saving, and the player can proceed with the game under a high base state until the next jackpot. You can In this way, by gradually revealing the number of times of concealment in a secret state, the player's sense of expectation for continuation of electric power support, the feeling of tension at the end of electric power support, and the uplifting feeling when continuation of electric power support is found It is possible to create a game property such as (hidden-time secret game). It should be noted that under the time saving state after the 201st game in which the infinite time saving is known, the normal time saving effect mode (air battle mode) may be used, but as shown in the figure, a special time saving effect mode different from the normal time saving effect mode (for example, , A background display (not shown) different from the air battle mode may be displayed to definitely notify that the time is infinite.

In addition, in the above, the three-way relationship of the hourly and short-term big hits α to γ (the finite short-time and big hits of 50 times, the finite short-time and big hits of 100 times and the infinite short-time and big hits) having different times and hours, respectively, was explained, but at least the times If the two short-time jackpots are different from each other, the above-mentioned short-time short-time concealed game can be realized. In addition, in the example of FIG. 34B, the short-time large hits α to γ each having a different time saving number have been described, but a plurality of probability variation big hits having different ST numbers (for example, a finite probability variation big hit α of 50 ST times, ST number 100 times). The same phenomenon occurs for the finite probability variable big hit β of times and the infinite probability big hit γ). In this case, it is possible to realize the “ST number concealment game” in which the number of STs in the secret state is disclosed step by step.

[Aperiodic application form]
<Applying form (μ)>
In the above-described granting form (κ)(λ), the form in which the small privilege is periodically granted has been described, but the form in which the small privilege is granted in an aperiodic manner may be used (aperiodic granting). form). For example, the privilege trigger timing is the 200th game, the 350th game, the 600th game, and the 800th game. In the case of the non-periodic grant form, a plurality of privilege triggers may be determined by lottery, and a plurality of privilege trigger scenarios (scenarios in which a plurality of privilege trigger games are predetermined) are available. It may be configured such that one of the privilege trigger scenarios can be determined by a lottery. Since the other points (items regarding the large privilege, the small privilege, etc.) are the same as those described in the above-described granting forms (κ) (λ), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[Other modes]
<Applying form (ν)>
In the above-mentioned divided privilege granting mode, a mode has been described in which the small privilege is divided and granted with the profit of the large privilege as the upper limit. However, the profit of the large privilege may not be set as the upper limit. For example, the “specific privilege” is periodically or aperiodically provided, but the upper limit of the benefit to be provided is not set. In short, the large privilege is an infinite system privilege (infinite time shortening, infinite probability variation or infinite latent probability), and the small privilege is a finite system privilege (predetermined time reduction number of time saving state, predetermined ST number of limited variation or predetermined ST number). The number of times is limited and the small privilege is not limited to the number of times Y of grant, and is configured to be granted periodically or aperiodically until the next big hit. In this example, the number of times of grant Y is not limited (the number of times is infinite), and the character is different from the “divided grant” that has an upper limit. This example will be described with reference to, for example, FIG. 34(a). The small privilege “limited time limit of 25 times” is periodically given (given every 100 games in the normal state). The award is not completed at the time of p8 (fourth time), and is permanently awarded until the next big hit. Further, for example, with reference to FIGS. 34(B) and (C), at the time of p2, the privilege to be granted is not switched to “infinite time saving”, but the small privilege “limited time saving of 50 times saving time” is set. , P2 and thereafter are also given periodically (given every 100 games in the normal state). In addition, when the number of times of grant reaches a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of specified games, the advantage degree (profit state) of the small privilege may be increased. For example, with reference to FIG. 34(a), when the number of times of grant reaches 10, "the number of hours saved is relatively higher than the current small privilege "limited time of 25 times saved". It can be set as "50 times limited time" (medium benefit). The condition for switching from the small privilege to the medium privilege can be a case where the predetermined number of prescribed grants and/or the predetermined number of prescribed games has been reached.

The present invention, which includes the above-described embodiment and the technical idea regarding the added form (added forms (α) to (μ): FIG. 33 to FIG. 34) related to the modified example, has the following configurations (configuration A) to (configuration). G).
(Structure A)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball in the game area,
A lottery means for executing a lottery on winning when the starting means detects a game ball,
A symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of symbols and displaying a lottery result by the lottery means in a stop display mode of the symbols,
A gaming machine provided with a profit state generating means capable of generating a profit state advantageous to a player based on a predetermined generation condition,
The profit status generating means is
When winning the lottery by the lottery means, a winning game execution control means for executing and controlling a winning game,
A first profit state generating means for generating a first profit state after the hit game is finished,
After a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the winning game is not executed, and a second profit state generating means for generating a second profit state when a specific generating condition is satisfied is provided,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
(Configuration B)
The first profit state and the second profit state are the same profit state,
A gaming machine having the above configuration A characterized in that.
(Structure C)
The first profit state and the second profit state are different profit states,
The gaming machine according to the above-mentioned configuration A characterized in that.
(Configuration D)
The second profit state has a lower profit state than the first profit state,
The gaming machine according to the above-mentioned configuration A characterized in that.
(Structure E)
The first profit state ends when a predetermined game period elapses after the winning game is started,
The second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is satisfied, and then is temporarily ended when a predetermined game period has elapsed, and the second profit state is restarted when the specific occurrence condition is satisfied again. ,
The gaming machine according to the above configuration A or configuration B.
(Structure F)
The first profit state ends after a predetermined number of games have passed after the hit game was started,
The second profit state is started after the establishment of the specific occurrence condition, and then continues until the winning game is won,
The gaming machine described in the above configuration A or configuration C.
(Structure G)
The first profit state ends when the first game period elapses after the winning game is started,
The second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is satisfied, and then ends when a second game period shorter than the first game period elapses, and the second profit state is satisfied when the specific occurrence condition is satisfied again. 2 profit status is resumed,
The gaming machine according to any one of the configuration A, the configuration C, and the configuration D, characterized in that.

[Second Embodiment]
<Delivery performance under the condition with electric support>
By the way, in recent years, due to legal requirements, it has been demanded to appropriately suppress the aspiration of euphoria. In the time saving state or the probability changing state, the electric support is provided, and the base state is controlled to be higher than the normal state (low base state without electric support). The state with the electric power support (high base state) is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player because the player can aim for the next big hit without reducing the number of balls he has in the normal state. However, if the base value (so-called ball output rate: "safe ball count/out ball count" x 100) is excessively reduced in order to suppress aspirational motivation, the player will be in a state with electric power support. The number of balls held by the player will decrease, not only will the player's willingness to play decrease, but as a result, the amount of money (consumption amount) used by the player will increase, resulting in Will reduce the willingness to play. In particular, when an infinite time reduction or infinite probability variation is given as a ceiling benefit, most of the players continue playing until the next big hit is won, so the number of games until the next big hit wins The number of owned balls also decreases. That is, for the player, the player is faced with a situation in which the amount of investment is increased even during the ceiling privilege, and the player's willingness to play is significantly reduced. In addition, many players continue to play in order to benefit from the extraordinary ceiling privilege, so the amount of money used continues to increase, erasing the significance of the ceiling function as a hamari relief function, and instead of shooting. It can also be agitating.

Therefore, it is necessary to take measures to prevent the number of balls to be extremely reduced. For example, it can be said that setting the payout rate (base value) in the high base state to be at least “100%≦the payout rate” is appropriate from the viewpoint of suppressing the player's willingness to play and motivation to play. Preferably, “100%≦ball output rate≦120% to 130%”. A specific configuration for achieving such a high base state payout rate will be described in detail below.

In the case of the present embodiment, as already described, the player is divided into the advantageous direction of either "left hit" or "right hit" depending on the game state, so "left hand win" is advantageous if there is no electric support. Therefore, there is a possibility of winning in the general winning openings 43a to 43d (first general winning means) and the upper starting opening 34 (first starting means) belonging to the left downflow path 3b, but belonging to the right downflow path 3c. The general winning opening 43e (second general winning means) and the lower starting opening 35 (second starting means) do not win. On the other hand, since there is a "right-handed advantage" in the state where there is electric support, there is a possibility of winning in the general winning opening 43e and the lower starting opening 35 (special figure 2 starting opening) belonging to the right downflow route 3c. The general winning openings 43a to 43d belonging to the leftward flow path 3b and the upper starting opening 34 (special figure 1 starting opening) do not win. Further, in a general gaming machine, the payout rate (the low base rate) is approximately 30% to 40% (at least less than 100%, preferably, without electric support). (50% or less), the ball output rate (high base base ball output rate) in the state with electric support (time saving state or probability changing state) is approximately 80% to 95%, and the ball output rate is less than 100% in all cases ( If you left it alone). If the gaming machine 1 is explained, the designed value of the expected payout rate is, for example, with respect to the average winning number per minute in the state without electric support, general winning holes 43a to 43d (3 winning balls) Are 2, 0.6, 0.4 and 1.04, respectively, and if the upper starting opening 34 (four award balls) is "5.52", the low base rate is 34.2%, on the other hand, regarding the average number of prizes per minute in the state without electric support, the general prize hole 43e (3 prize balls 3) is 12.5, the lower starting port 35 (1 prize ball 1) ) Is 58.2, the high base payout rate is 95.7%.

Here, in the case of a gaming machine such as the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment that needs to be divided into “left-handed” and “right-handed” depending on the gaming state, the above-mentioned high base base payout rate is set. In order not to reduce extremely, general arrangement winning openings 43a to 43e (3 prize balls), upper starting opening 34 (4 prize balls), lower starting opening 35 (1 prize ball) This can be achieved by devising the number of balls. Specifically, it can be realized by the following methods (A) to (H).

(A) The number of prize balls at the general winning opening 43e and/or the lower starting opening 35 (starting opening on the side of the normal variable winning device 41 (starting opening with electric chew)) is increased. Specifically, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening belonging to the right downflow route 3c is set to be larger than the number of prize balls of the general winning opening belonging to the left downflow route 3b. Alternatively, the number of prize balls of the lower starting opening 35 is set to be larger than the number of prize balls of the general winning opening belonging to the leftward flow path 3b. Alternatively, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening and the lower starting opening 35 belonging to the right flowing path 3c is set to be larger than the number of prize balls of the general winning opening belonging to the left falling path 3b. For example, there are four general winning openings 43e, two lower starting openings 35, and the like.

(B) At least the number of general winning openings 43e is increased (the number of general winning openings belonging to the rightward-flowing route 3c is increased from 1 to 2, and the number of winnings (number of winnings/minute) to the general winning openings at right striking is increased. Raise the bottom). Specifically, the number of general winning openings (the number of installations) belonging to the right downflow path 3c is larger than the number of general winning openings (the number of installations) belonging to the left downflow path 3b. In the present embodiment, four general winning openings belonging to the left downflow route 3b (general winning openings 43a to 43d) are arranged, but, for example, one general winning opening 43e belonging to the right downflow route 3c is provided. More than that, for example, 2 to 4, and so on.

(C) At least increase the winning rate (ball winning rate) of the general winning opening 43e (for example, increase from 12.5/min to 20/min). When a plurality of general winning openings 43e are provided, at least one winning rate is increased. Specifically, the winning rate M of the general winning opening belonging to the right downflow route 3c is set to be higher than the winning rate N of the general winning opening belonging to the left downflow route 3b.
In addition, in the case of this embodiment, since a plurality of general winning openings 43a to 43d are arranged, the following structure may be adopted. When the lowest winning rate of the general winning openings 43a to 43d is "Nmin" and the highest winning rate is "Nmax", the following relational expression (Equation 1) or (Equation 2) is satisfied. can do.
(Formula 1) “Nmin<M”
(Formula 2) “Nmax<M”
Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the number of the general winning openings 43e is one, but when a plurality of general winning openings 43e are provided, the following may be adopted. Among the plurality of general winning openings 43e, when the winning rate of the lowest general winning opening 43e is "Mmin" and the highest winning rate is "Mmax", the following relational expressions (Equation 3) to (Equation 6) ) Can be satisfied.
(Formula 3) “N<Mmin” (when there is one general winning opening belonging to the leftward flow path 3b)
(Formula 4) “Nmin<Mmin”
(Formula 5) “Nmax<Mmin”
(Equation 6) “Nmax<Mmax”

(D) Start INT (interval time until the start of opening of the movable wing piece 47) and/or end INT (interval time between the end of the opening operation of the movable wing piece 47 and the end of the normal electric open game) ) Is longer (for example, the start INT and/or the end INT is 500 ms to 700 ms). In this case, it is possible to increase the number of balls held (increase the ball output rate) by so-called “stop hitting”, which avoids waste balls (dead balls) at the time of leaving. For example, in the case of hitting the ball out, the payout rate (BA) can be about 95%, and in the case of stopping, the payout rate can be about 120%. This stopping is particularly effective when the number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is large (for example, about 3 to 4).

(E) One or a plurality of small hits that cause small hit game operations such that the number of small hits during the small hit game does not increase or the number of small hits decreases (in the present embodiment, at least the special figure 2 side has the small hit) Be provided). For example, the opening time of the special winning opening is set to a short time (about 0.1 second to 1 second), and the "start INT and/or end INT (may be the total time of each INT)" which is the special winning opening closing period is the second. It is a small hit game operation for a long time of the order (for example, about 1 to 5 seconds). In such a small hit game, the payout performance is low, and when the game ball is left unattended, the payout does not increase (the payout ratio during the small hit game is 100%) or the payout may decrease. (The winning rate during a small hit game is less than 100%). In this case, similar to (D) described above, if "stop hit" is used during the start INT and the end INT, it is possible to increase the number of balls held against the payout performance during the small hitting game. Therefore, the payout rate can be improved. In particular, if the small hit is won with a high probability (the occurrence frequency of the small hit game is increased), for example, at least about 1/5 to 1/20 is won, the effect is further enhanced.

(F) The number of prize balls of the lower starting port 35 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls of the upper starting port 34. Increasing the number of award balls that can be frequently won during electric support increases the hitting-off effect (technical intervention level increases), which may lead to inequalities among players. .. Therefore, it is preferable to use a winning opening other than the downward starting opening 35 (in particular, a general winning opening belonging to the rightward flow path 3c) as the winning opening that greatly affects the payout rate.

(G) The number of prize balls of the lower start opening 35 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls of the general winning opening belonging to the rightward flow path 3c. There is a difference in the winning rate due to stop striking, the number of "general winning openings (general winning opening 43e)" that belongs to the "right downflow route 3c" that does not cause a difference in winning rate due to stopping By increasing the number of prize balls, it is possible to reduce the elements of capture by stopping.

(H) The number of prize balls in the lower starting opening 35 is one, and the number of prize balls in the general winning opening belonging to the rightward flow path 3c is at least two. If the number of award balls in the lower start opening 35 is 1, even if the winning rate is 100%, the number of net additions will be 0, so let's aim at the opening operation of the lower start opening 35 and use stop hits. Both players do not have more balls. Therefore, by setting the number of prize balls in the lower starting opening 35 to one and setting the number of prize balls in the general winning opening belonging to the rightward-flowing route 3c to at least two, it is possible to completely eliminate the catching element due to stop hitting and The ball rate can be improved.

In the case of the above (D) or (E), there is a possibility that an unequal sense of gain may be brought about between those who make full use of stop and strike and those who do not. Therefore, it is preferable to adopt the above-mentioned configurations (A) to (C) and (F) to (H) regarding the general winning opening having no hit-and-stop effect. In particular, the configurations (B), (C), (F) to (H) described above are effective in reducing the hitting-off effect and improving the ball output rate. Further, the number of the general winning openings belonging to the left downflow path 3c or the general winning openings belonging to the right downflow path 3c can be one or more.

(Modifications related to model type)
In this embodiment, the ST type model has been described. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the ST type model, and may be a model whose game state transition mode is determined as follows, for example, the following (machine 1) to (machine 3) models.

(Machine 1) "V Probability type"
If you win one or more specific jackpots (for example, probability variation jackpot 1-7), you can easily pass the game balls to the specified area (passable) On the other hand, when the other big hits (for example, the short-time big hit 1, 2) are won, it is difficult or impossible to pass the specific area, and when the game ball passes the specific area (so-called “ Only for "V winning"), a special symbol probability changing function is activated to shift to a probability changing state or a latent probability state, so-called "V probability changing type" may be used.

(Machine 2) "Falling lottery type"
In the case of a game state with a high probability state (latent probability state or probability change state), a so-called “falling lottery” such as performing a transition lottery (falling lottery) from a high probability state to a low probability state at a predetermined fall probability for each game. It may be a "lottery type" model. In this falling lottery type, when winning the falling lottery, the winning game (falling game) is shifted to a low probability state (at least the special symbol probability changing function is set to OFF), and the jackpot lottery in the winning game is also in a low probability state. It will be drawn by lot. There are the following cases (A) to (C) in the game state transition mode when winning the falling lottery. (A) Probably changed state (ST mode)→time saving state (time saving mode), (B) Probably changed state→normal state (normal mode), (C) Latent probability state (latent probability mode)→normal state (normal mode). In such a falling lottery type, in the falling game, the game state is shifted to at least a low probability state. Therefore, when the running game in the normal state or the time saving state is to be counted in the ceiling game, it is preferable to count the falling game as the first game. The next game may be counted as the first game, excluding the falling game.

The ST type model described in the above embodiment and the falling lottery type of this example (machine 2) are mainly "presence/absence of falling lottery (falling lottery means)" and "falling transition control based on the falling lottery result ( The presence/absence of a fall transition control means)" is different. Therefore, with respect to the matters relating to the playability described in the present embodiment (for example, FIGS. 21 to 34), before winning the falling lottery (when the gaming state is accompanied by a high probability state), it is applicable to the embodiment relating to the ST mode. Therefore, after winning the falling lottery (when winning the falling lottery and transitioning to a gaming state with a low probability state), the normal state and the time saving state (the gaming state of the falling transition destination) Applicable.

By the way, the conventional falling lottery type has only one kind of falling probability regardless of the type of big hit (type of winning symbol), the game tends to be monotonous, and the fun of the game is lacking. Therefore, a plurality of types of falling probabilities are provided according to the type of jackpot. In this case, the big hits may have different falling probabilities, or some of them may have the same or different falling probabilities. When it is assumed that the gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment is a “falling lottery type”, for example, the probability of falling is 1/200, 1/150, 1/100, a probability change of 1 to 3 (special figure 1 side) Big hits 4 to 7 (special map 2 side) are 1/240, so different falling probabilities if you win big hits belonging to the special figure 1 side, the same falling probability if you win the big hit on special figure 2 side Can be In addition, as a means for providing a plurality of types of falling probabilities, it is possible to set a falling probability according to a set value (settings 1 to 6). In other words, at least the first set value and the second set value can be configured to have different fall probabilities. For example, the lower the set value, the higher the falling probability.

The number of STs may be the same as the number of STs in each jackpot, may be different from each other, or may be partially different from each other. Further, the ST number can include not only a finite number but also an infinite number. For example, like the probability variation big hits 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 4, the number of STs may be 25 times, 75 times, 100 times, or the number of STs for each big hit may be 100 times or an infinite number. However, in the case of the falling lottery type, if the falling lottery is won before the ST number is exhausted, the state is forcibly shifted to the low probability state (the ST number is forcibly reduced to zero). In addition, when the falling lottery is won, the setting suggesting effect (falling setting suggesting effect) may be configured to be executable by the effecting means. In this case, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect at the time of falling can be determined according to the set value.

Regarding the above-mentioned falling lottery type, for example, the following configurations (T1) to (T3) can be adopted.
(T1)
An acquisition unit that acquires a plurality of types of game information including the first game information (random number for jackpot determination) and the second game information (random number for fall determination) based on the satisfaction of the starting condition (for example, FIG. 11). S314: In the case of this example, a big hit determination random number, a special symbol determination random number, a variation pattern random number, a fall determination random number are configured to be obtainable),
Lottery means (S410 in FIG. 12) that executes lottery related to a plurality of types of wins based on the first game information acquired by the acquisition means,
A symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) that performs a variable display operation of symbols and displays the lottery result by the lottery means in the symbol stop display mode,
When the symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode on the symbol display means (when the lottery result of the lottery means is a hit), a winning game execution control means (FIG. 17) for executing and controlling a winning game,
After the hit game is finished, the probability variation control means (S412 of FIG. 12, FIG. 15, FIG. 18) that can be controlled to a high probability state that the lottery probability of winning by the lottery means is higher than a predetermined normal probability. , FIG. 21, FIG. 22),
When in the high probability state, based on the second game information (falling determination random number value), the falling lottery means (mainly executing the falling lottery to determine whether or not to shift from the high probability state to the low probability state). Control unit 20),
A game machine T provided with a fall transition control means (main control unit 20) for controlling the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state when winning the fall lottery,
The plurality of types of hits include at least a first hit and a second hit,
In the case where the first hit is won (when the hit game is executed by the first hit) and when the second hit is won (when the hit game is executed by the second hit), The falling lottery means may have different falling lottery probabilities.

(T2)
The gaming machine T is configured so that the probability of the result of the big hit lottery being a predetermined result is different according to the setting value that can be changed in a plurality of steps. In this case, the setting values that can be changed in a plurality of steps include at least a first setting value and a second setting value, and the falling probability is different between the first setting value and the second setting value. be able to.

(T3)
The gaming machine T is configured so that the probability of the result of the jackpot lottery being a predetermined result is different according to the setting value that can be changed in a plurality of stages,
The plurality of types of hits include at least a first hit and a second hit,
The setting values that can be changed in multiple steps include at least a first setting value and a second setting value,
The falling lottery probability by the falling lottery means is configured to be different between when the first win is won and when the second win is won.
In the case where the set value is the first set value, at least the second winning is not included in the lottery result by the lottery means.

In addition, the gaming machine T is configured to be able to control a plurality of types of gaming states (at least two gaming states including a probability variation state and/or a latency probability state among probability variation state, latent probability state, time saving state and normal state). can do. Further, in the above ((T1) to (T3), it is possible to further include setting suggestion effect executing means capable of executing setting suggestion effect suggesting the current set value when the falling lottery means wins the falling lottery. ..

(Machine 3) "Type with limiter"
When the big hit is won (may be a specific big win), the so-called "limiter function" has a limiter function to limit the number of times the probability variation control unit shifts to the high probability state to a predetermined upper limit number (limit number). It is also possible to use a model equipped with a limiter. The limiter mounting type corresponds to, for example, a so-called “limiter machine (set type)” disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 5075301.

In the case of the limiter mounting type, until the number of jackpot winnings reaches a predetermined limit number (until the number of continuous operation of the condition device reaches a predetermined upper limit number), the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished with a high probability state ( Probability change state or latent probability state). For example, if the limit number of times is 5, the gaming state after the big hit game is controlled to a high probability state from the first big hit to the fourth big hit, and the benefit of the big hit lottery under the high probability state up to a maximum of 4 big hits. You will be able to receive it. However, if you win the 5th big hit, the limiter function starts to operate (limiter function ON) as the limit number of times has been reached, and the game state after the big hit game is a state with a low probability state (time saving state Or, it shifts to the normal state). If you hit the big hit while this limiter function is operating, the limiter function in operation will be canceled (limiter function OFF), and the game state after the big hit game will transition to a game state with a high probability state until the limit number of times is reached again. To be done. In this respect, a limiter machine that limits the number of times to 5 is also referred to as a "5-time pack machine".

By the way, the conventional limiter machine has only one limit number of times, the game tends to be monotonous, and lacks the fun of the game. Therefore, a plurality of types of limit times are provided according to the type of jackpot. In this case, each jackpot may have a different limit number, or some of them may have different limit numbers.

For example, the big hits A to D can be provided, and the number of times of the big hits A to D can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5 times. Further, the symbol lottery rate for each jackpot can be appropriately determined. Further, depending on which big hit is won, it is possible to appropriately determine whether to shift to the probability changing state or the latent probability state. For example, all of the jackpots A to C may be shifted to the probability variation state or the latent probability state, or only one or more specific jackpots may be shifted to the probability variation state (for example, when the jackpot A is won). Will shift to the probability change state, and if other jackpots B, C and D are won, shift to the latent probability state). The number of STs is preferably an infinite number, but the same number of STs may be used for each jackpot, different numbers of STs may be used for each jackpot, and some STs may be different. In addition, when the number of STs is finite, even if the number of STs ends and the state is shifted to the normal state or the time saving state, the gaming state after the big hit game is again set to the high probability state until the limit number of times is reached. It is possible to shift to a gaming state with. Of the big hits A to D, if you win a specific big hit, you may move to a gaming state (time saving state or normal state) accompanied by a low probability state without shifting to a high probability state. Whether to shift or to shift to the normal state can be appropriately determined.

Also in the case of the limiter machine, the matters relating to the playability described in the present embodiment (for example, FIGS. 21 to 34) are applied to the embodiment relating to the ST mode for the gaming state involving the high probability state before reaching the limiter count. It is possible, and the gaming state involving the low probability state after reaching the limiter number is applicable to the embodiment relating to the normal state and the time saving state (the gaming state after reaching the limit number).

A configuration in which one or more of all the embodiments described above (including the configurations described in each of the embodiments and all of the modifications) are combined may be used, and the content described in each embodiment is only for an individual embodiment. It is not limited.

Further, in each of the embodiments described above, the game machine using the game ball as the game medium has been described, but the game machine is not particularly limited as long as it can achieve the object of the present invention. For example, a game machine that uses a game medal as a game medium, and a game machine that manages information about the game medium (such as a player's ball with a prize or a prize ball) by using electromagnetic recording means (so-called "enclosed" Type gaming machine (management type gaming machine)” or the like.

The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 gaming machine,
2 front frame (door),
3, 3a game board, game area,
19 gaming ball payout device,
20 main controller (main control board),
24 Production control unit (production control board, liquid crystal control board)
28 firing control board,
29 payout control board,
34, 34a Upper starting port, Upper starting port sensor 35, 35a Lower starting port, Lower starting port sensor,
37, 37a Normal symbol starting port, normal symbol starting port sensor,
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39a Ordinary symbol display device,
50, 52a special winning opening, big winning opening sensor 41, 41c ordinary variable winning device, ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
52, 52c special variation winning device, special winning opening solenoid,
36, 45, 46 Liquid crystal display device, decorative lamp, speaker,
49 Out mouth,
94 setting key switch,
95 setting change switch,
96 Setting change complete switch,
97 Setting display,
98 RAM clear switch,
201, 202, 203 main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM,
241, 242, 243 Production control CPU, production control ROM, production control RAM.

Claims (8)

A launching means capable of launching a game ball in the game area,
A lottery means for executing a lottery on winning when the starting means detects a game ball,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit, a hit game execution control means for executing and controlling a hit game,
A symbol display means for performing variable display of symbols and displaying a lottery result by the lottery means in a stop display mode of the symbols,
After the hitting game is over, a bonus game state control means capable of controlling to a privilege game state with a ball entry advantageous state in which the entry state to the starting means is more advantageous than the normal game state,
A plurality of general winning means that does not trigger the lottery execution by the lottery means even if a game ball is detected,
When the starting means or the plurality of general winning means detects a game ball, a prize ball payout means for paying out a prize ball, and
Depending on the strength of the game ball that is launched by the launching means, the game area is configured to be able to be divided into a first downflow path and a second downflow path, and the first downflow path and the second downflow path depending on the gaming state. A gaming machine configured such that the progress of the game acts advantageously or unfavorably for the player depending on which of the descending paths the gaming ball is caused to flow down,
During the privilege game state, it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game if the game ball is made to flow down to the second flow-down path rather than the first flow-down path.
The plurality of general winning means include a first general winning means belonging to the first downflow route and a second general winning means belonging to the second downflow route,
The winning rate of the second general winning means is higher than the winning rate of the first general winning means,
A gaming machine characterized by that. A launching means capable of launching a game ball in the game area,
A lottery means for executing a lottery on winning when the starting means detects a game ball,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit, a hit game execution control means for executing and controlling a hit game,
A symbol display means for performing variable display of symbols and displaying a lottery result by the lottery means in a stop display mode of the symbols,
After the hitting game is over, a bonus game state control means capable of controlling to a privilege game state with a ball entry advantageous state in which the entry state to the starting means is more advantageous than the normal game state,
A plurality of general winning means that does not trigger the lottery execution by the lottery means even if a game ball is detected,
When the starting means or the plurality of general winning means detects a game ball, a prize ball payout means for paying out a prize ball, and
Depending on the strength of the game ball that is launched by the launching means, the game area is configured to be able to be divided into a first downflow path and a second downflow path, and the first downflow path and the second downflow path depending on the gaming state. A gaming machine configured such that the progress of the game acts advantageously or unfavorably for the player depending on which of the descending paths the gaming ball is caused to flow down,
During the privilege game state, it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game if the game ball is made to flow down to the second flow-down path rather than the first flow-down path.
The plurality of general winning means include a first general winning means belonging to the first downflow route and a second general winning means belonging to the second downflow route,
The number of the second general winning means is larger than the number of the first general winning means,
A gaming machine characterized by that. A launching means capable of launching a game ball in the game area,
A lottery means for executing a lottery on winning when the starting means detects a game ball,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit, a hit game execution control means for executing and controlling a hit game,
A symbol display means for performing variable display of symbols and displaying a lottery result by the lottery means in a stop display mode of the symbols,
After the hitting game is over, a bonus game state control means capable of controlling to a privilege game state with a ball entry advantageous state in which the entry state to the starting means is more advantageous than the normal game state,
A plurality of general winning means that does not trigger the lottery execution by the lottery means even if a game ball is detected,
When the starting means or the plurality of general winning means detects a game ball, a prize ball payout means for paying out a prize ball, and
Depending on the strength of the game ball that is launched by the launching means, the game area is configured to be able to be divided into a first downflow path and a second downflow path, and the first downflow path and the second downflow path depending on the gaming state. A gaming machine configured such that the progress of the game acts advantageously or unfavorably for the player depending on which of the descending paths the gaming ball is caused to flow down,
During the privilege game state, it is configured that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game if the game ball is made to flow down to the second flow-down path rather than the first flow-down path.
The plurality of general winning means includes a first general winning means belonging to the first downflow route and a second general winning means belonging to the second downflow route,
The number of prize balls of the second general prize winning means is larger than the number of prize balls of the first general prize winning means,
A gaming machine characterized by that. The starting means includes:
At least a first starting means that does not change the ball entry state of the game ball by the privilege game state control means and a second starting means that changes the ball entry state of the game ball by the privilege game state control means are included.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that: In the normal game state, the rate of exit is less than 100%,
The winning rate during the privilege game state is configured to be 100% or more,
The gaming machine according to claim 4, characterized in that. The number of prize balls of the second starting means is smaller than the number of prize balls of the first starting means,
The gaming machine according to claim 4 or 5, characterized in that. The number of prize balls of the second starting means is smaller than that of the second general winning means.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 4 to 6, characterized in that. The number of prize balls of the second starting means is one, and the number of prize balls of the second general winning means is at least two.
The gaming machine according to claim 4 or 5, characterized in that.